SIAE - ALS PDH Radio Family - Manual

ALS
Access Link Series PDH radio family
User manual
MN.00183.E - 003 Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark. Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark. Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1. USER GUIDE
11
1 2
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................11 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................12 2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................12 2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................12 2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................12 2.2 2.3 2.4 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................13 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment) ....15 INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................15
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................16 3.1 3.2 3.3 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................16 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................16 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................16
Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
19
ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................19 4.1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................19
SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................21 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................21 5.1.1 General .................................................................................................21 RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................21 APPLICATION ...................................................................................................21 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................22 5.4.1 Modular IDU...........................................................................................22 5.4.2 Compact IDU unit ...................................................................................23 5.4.3 Modular IDU Plus ....................................................................................23 5.4.4 IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)..................................................................24 5.4.5 ODU......................................................................................................24 5.5 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................................................25
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
5.5.1 Hardware platform ..................................................................................25 5.5.2 Management ports ..................................................................................25 5.5.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................25 6 EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................28 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................28 SERVICE CHANNELS .........................................................................................28 TRANSMISSION CAPACITY .................................................................................29 POWER SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS ...................31
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT ...............................................................40 7.1 7.2 GENERAL.........................................................................................................40 TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .....................................................................................40 7.2.1 2 Mbit/s interface....................................................................................40 7.2.2 34 Mbit/s interface ..................................................................................41 7.2.3 Ethernet interface ...................................................................................41 7.3 7.4 STM-1 INTERFACE ............................................................................................41 7.3.1 Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface ................................................42 SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE...........................................................................43 7.4.1 2 Mbit/s wayside interface........................................................................43 7.4.2 64 kbit/s codirectional interface ..............................................................43 7.4.3 64 kbit/s contradirectional interface V.11 .................................................44 7.4.4 Analogue interface ..................................................................................44 7.4.5 9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data .................................44 7.4.6 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data .....................................44 7.4.7 Alarm interface.......................................................................................44 7.4.8 Network Management Interface ................................................................45 7.5 7.6 7.7 MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR .............................................................................46 CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................46 AVAILABLE LOOPS ............................................................................................46
DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES ................47 8.1 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU VERSION ......................................................................47 8.1.1 LIM .......................................................................................................47 8.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................47 8.1.3 RIM.......................................................................................................50 8.1.3.1 8.1.3.2 8.1.3.3 8.1.3.4 8.1.4.1 8.1.4.2 8.1.4.3 8.2 QAM modulator ........................................................................50 QAM demodulator.....................................................................50 Power supply ...........................................................................50 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................50 Service signals.........................................................................51 Equipment software..................................................................51 Supervision ports .....................................................................52
8.1.4 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................51
IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................52 8.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................52 8.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................52 8.2.3 IDU loop ................................................................................................53
DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH lim ETHERNET (2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET TRAFFIC) ...............................................................................................63 9.1 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................63
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
9.1.1 LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries..............................................................63 9.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................63 9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic ...................................................................66 9.1.3.1 9.1.3.2 9.1.3.3 9.1.3.4 9.1.3.5 9.1.3.6 9.1.3.7 9.1.3.8 9.1.3.9 9.1.3.10 9.1.3.11 9.1.3.12 9.1.4.1 9.1.4.2 9.1.4.3 9.1.4.4 9.1.5.1 9.1.6.1 9.2 2 Mbit/s tributaries ...................................................................66 Electrical Ethernet interface .......................................................67 Front panel LEDs ......................................................................67 Switch function ........................................................................67 Ethernet Full Duplex function .....................................................68 Link Loss Forwarding ................................................................68 MDI/MDIX crossover ...............................................................68 VLAN functionality ....................................................................69 Switch organized by port ...........................................................69 Switch organized by VLAN ID .....................................................69 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p........................................70 Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IPV4 ToS (DSCP) ........................71 QAM modulator ........................................................................71 QAM demodulator.....................................................................71 Power supply ...........................................................................71 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................72 Service signals.........................................................................72 Supervision ports .....................................................................73
9.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................71
9.1.5 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................72 9.1.6 Equipment software ................................................................................72 IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................74 9.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................74 9.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................74 9.2.3 IDU loop ................................................................................................74 10 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES ..................81 10.1 IDU COMPACT 1+0/1+1 VERSION ......................................................................81
11 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES AND FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ..........................................................................................82 11.1 VERSION IDU COMPACT ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 .......................................................82
12 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU PLUS FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES HIERARCHIC AND NOT HIERARCHIC ............................................................................................83 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 GENERAL.........................................................................................................83 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU .......................................................................83 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU .......................................................................84 1RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................84 2RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................85 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .........................................................................85 MATRIX STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU) ...................................................................85 DROP-INSERT (2RU) .........................................................................................85 NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)......................................................................................87 12.9.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodes ....................................................................87 12.9.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes.....................................................................88 12.10 DYNAMIC MODULATION ....................................................................................90 12.10.1Capacity reduction .................................................................................90 12.10.2Setting with SCT/LCT .............................................................................91 12.11 LIM.................................................................................................................91
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION......................................................................................91 12.13 RIM ................................................................................................................93 12.13.1QAM modulator .....................................................................................94 12.13.2QAM demodulator ..................................................................................94 12.13.3Power supply.........................................................................................94 12.13.4Telemetry IDU/ODU ...............................................................................94 12.14 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER..................................................................................94 12.14.1Service signals ......................................................................................95 12.14.2Equipment software ...............................................................................95 12.14.3Supervision ports ...................................................................................96 12.15 IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................96 12.15.1Tributary loop........................................................................................96 12.15.2Baseband unit loop ................................................................................96 12.15.3IDU loop ...............................................................................................97 12.16 EXPANSION 53E1 .............................................................................................97 12.17 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER .............................................................................97 12.18 PROCESSOR 53E1.............................................................................................97 13 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT PLUS FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES AND ETHERNET TRAFFIC ................................................................................................................103 13.1 IDU COMPACT PLUS ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 VERSION ............................................. 103
14 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR E/W REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT ...104 14.1 14.2 14.3 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 104 COMPOSITION ............................................................................................... 104 IDU CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................... 105 14.3.1 Management of tributaries ..................................................................... 105 14.3.2 Capacity .............................................................................................. 105 14.3.3 E1 switching criteria .............................................................................. 105 14.4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................... 105 14.4.1 Matrix ................................................................................................. 106 14.4.2 Processor............................................................................................. 106 14.4.3 RIM..................................................................................................... 109 14.4.3.1 14.4.3.2 14.4.3.3 14.4.3.4 14.4.4.1 14.4.4.2 14.4.4.3 14.5 QAM modulator ...................................................................... 109 QAM demodulator................................................................... 109 Power supply ......................................................................... 109 Telemetry IDU/ODU................................................................ 109 Service signals....................................................................... 110 Equipment software................................................................ 110 Supervision ports ................................................................... 111
14.4.4 CONTROLLER ....................................................................................... 110
IDU LOOPS .................................................................................................... 111 14.5.1 Tributary loop....................................................................................... 111 14.5.2 Baseband unit loop ............................................................................... 111 14.5.3 IDU loop .............................................................................................. 112
15 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT ...........................................................116 15.1 15.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 116 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ............................................................................. 116
16 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................118 16.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 118
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7
TRANSMIT SECTION........................................................................................ 118 RECEIVE SECTION .......................................................................................... 119 CABLE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 119 ATPC OPERATION ........................................................................................... 119 1+1 Tx SYSTEM............................................................................................. 119 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 120
17 24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089 ...............................................................126 17.1 17.2 17.3 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 126 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 126 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................... 126
Section 3. INSTALLATION
131
18 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY.....................................................................................................131 18.1 18.2 18.3 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION........................ 131 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 132 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 132 18.3.1 IDU installation..................................................................................... 132 18.3.2 1RU IDU installation .............................................................................. 132 18.3.3 2RU IDU installation .............................................................................. 132 18.4 18.5 18.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 132 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS .............................................................. 134 GROUNDING CONNECTION .............................................................................. 134
19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS ......................................................................135 19.1 19.2 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR VERSION .................................. 135 MODULAR VERSION CONNECTORS.................................................................... 136
20 IDU COMPACT USER CONNECTIONS .......................................................................140 20.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 COMPACT VERSION................................... 140
21 MODULAR IDU PLUS USER CONNECTIONS .............................................................144 21.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU PLUS VERSION .................... 144
22 IDU COMPACT PLUS USER CONNECTIONS ..............................................................151 22.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU COMPACT PLUS VERSION............................. 151
23 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........157 23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 157 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 158 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 158 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 160
24 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........174 24.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 174
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
24.2 24.3 24.4
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 174 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 175 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 177
25 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........188 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 188 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 188 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 189 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 189 25.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 189 25.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 190 25.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 191 25.5 25.6 25.7 ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 191 COMPATIBILITY.............................................................................................. 191 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 192
26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................208 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 208 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 208 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 209 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 209 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 210 26.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 210 26.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 210 26.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 210 26.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 210 26.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 210 26.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 211 26.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 211 26.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 211 26.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 211 26.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 212 27 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA...223 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 223 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 223 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 223 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 224 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 224 27.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 224 27.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 225 27.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 225 27.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 225 27.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 225 27.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 225 27.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 225 27.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 226 27.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 226 27.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 226 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
(KIT V32323).........................................................................................................237 28.1 28.2 28.3 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 237 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 237 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 237
Section 4. LINE-UP
245
29 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................245 29.1 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 245 29.1.1 Equipment configuration ........................................................................ 245 29.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 246 29.1.3 Network element configuration ............................................................... 246 29.1.4 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 247 30 LINEUP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 Mbit/s ....................................................................249 30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 249 LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 249 LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 254 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 257 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC ........................ 258 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC .... 260 3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT ............................ 261
31 LINEUP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT .......................264 31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 31.5 31.6 31.7 31.8 31.9 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 264 BASEBAND CONFIGURATION............................................................................ 264 EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 265 EAST OR WEST PRESETTING ............................................................................ 266 TRIBUTARY ENABLING .................................................................................... 267 ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION ........................................................ 268 PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION .............................................................. 269 PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH) ............................................................ 269 PASSTHROUGH E1 CONNECTION .................................................................... 270
32 LINE-UP OF THE LINK WITH NODAL IDU ...............................................................271 32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 271 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 271 TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 272 Configuration of the Cross-connection matrix ..................................................... 272 32.4.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection.......................................................... 273 32.4.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection ..................................................... 275 33 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION .........................................................................................................277 33.1 PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 277
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 5. MAINTENANCE
289
34 PERIODICAL CHECKS .............................................................................................289 34.1 34.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 289 CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT .......................................................................... 289
35 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................290 35.1 35.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 290 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 290 35.2.1 Loop facilities ....................................................................................... 290 35.2.2 Alarm messages processing.................................................................... 291 36 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS. ..........................292 36.1 36.2 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 292 PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 292 36.2.1 General equipment configuration............................................................. 292 36.2.2 Addresses and routing table ................................................................... 293 36.2.3 Remote Element Table........................................................................... 294 37 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................295 37.1 37.2 37.3 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 295 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ............................................................................... 295 CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD .......................................................................... 295
Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
297
38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................297 38.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 297
Section 7. COMPOSITION
299
39 COMPOSITION OF MODULAR IDU...........................................................................299 39.1 39.2 39.3 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 299 IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 299 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT................................................................ 300
40 COMPOSITION OF COMPACT IDU ...........................................................................303 40.1 40.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 303 ALC IDU PART NUMBER ................................................................................... 303
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
41 COMPOSITION OF IDU COMPACT PLUS (ALC PLUS) ...............................................304 41.1 41.2 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 304 PART NUMBER OF IDU..................................................................................... 304
42 COMPOSITION OF IDU PLUS ..................................................................................305 42.1 42.2 42.3 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 305 IDU PLUS PART NUMBER ................................................................................. 305 COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS ...................................................................... 305 42.3.1 1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal......................................................................... 306 42.3.2 1+1 1RU 24E1 Terminal......................................................................... 306 42.3.3 1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal ......................................................................... 307 42.3.4 1+1 terminal 2RU 53E1 ......................................................................... 307 42.3.5 2RU 32E1 drop/insert ............................................................................ 308 42.3.6 Nodal 2RU STM1 E1 .............................................................................. 308 43 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................309 43.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 309
Section 8. LISTS AND SERVICES
313
44 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................313 45 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................319 46 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................321
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
10
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 1. USER GUIDE
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products: digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system digital radio relay system ALS4 ALS7 ALS8 ALS11 ALS13 ALS15 ALS18 ALS23 ALS25 ALS28 ALS32 ALS38
complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and therefore is marked CE. The following standards have been applied: EN 60950-1: 2006 Safety of information technology equipment. EN 301 4894 V.1.3.1 (20028): Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific conditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (200212): Fixed Radio Systems; Pointto point equipment and antennas; generic harmonized standard for pointtopoint digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
11
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.
2.1.1
Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth respiration at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure for mouth to mouth respiration method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2
Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning
Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections Apply dry gauze on the burns Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
12
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration Step Description Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body. If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.). Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under the patients head and one under his neck. 2 Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far as possible. Figure
Shift the hand from the patients neck to his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together. 3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open
With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities
While performing these operations observe if the patients chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patients nose is not obstructed, provided his nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must be kept sloping backwards as much as possible. Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
2.2
SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
13
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication
In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band (Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Fig.2 - Elasticized band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord
The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.
Fig.4 - Laser indication
14
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2.3
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419
2.4
INTERNAL BATTERY
Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to law.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
15
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and maintain the AL radio family. Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment: a basic understanding of microwave transmission installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section. Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the manual.
Section 2 Description and specifications

It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole equipment and units it consists of. List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.
Section 3 Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections. The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
16
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 4 LineUp
Lineup procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation. The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the faulty unit and to reestablish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 Programming and supervision

The AL radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available. Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 Lists and assistance

This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
17
18
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
ABBREVIATION LIST
4.1
AF AL ALS AIS ATPC BB BBER BER DSCP DSP E1
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Assured Forwarding Access Link Access LInk Series Alarm Indication Signal Automaric Transmit Power Control Baseband Background Block Error Radio Bit Error Rate Differentiated Service Code Point Digital Signal Processing 2 Mbit/s Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference Embedded Overhead Channel European Radiocommunication Committee Electrostatic Discharge Forward Error Corrector Fast Ethernet Module High Level Data Link Control Indoor Unit
EMC/EMI EOC ERC ESD FEC FEM HDLC IDU
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
19
IF IpToS LAN LAPS LCT LIM LLF LOF LOS MAC MDI MDIX MIB MMIC MTBF NE ODU OSI PDH PPI PPP PTOS RIM SCT SNMP TCP/IP TOS VID VLAN WFQ Wayside Traffic
Intermediate Frequency Type of Service IP Local Area Network Link Access Procedure SDH Local Craft Terminal Line Interface Module Link Loss Forwarding Loss Of Frame Loss Of Signal Media Access Control Medium Dependent Interface Medium Dependent Interface Crossover Management Information Base Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit Mean Time Between Failure Network Element Outdoor Unit Open System Interconnection Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Plesiochronous Physical Interface Point to Point Protocol Priority Type Of Service Radio Interface Module Subnetwork Craft Terminal Simple Network Management Protocol Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Type Of Service Virtual LAN Identifier Virtual LAN Wait Fair Queue Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic
20
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5.1.1
General
Access Link Series PDH (ALS) is the name of the new PDH radio family designed by SIAE for low/medium capacity transmission in the overall frequency bands from 4 GHz up to 38 GHz. Different versions offer a wide range of transmission capacity using programmable 4QAM/16QAM modulation or 32QAM modulation. Reduced cost, high reliability, compact size, light weight, fully programmability are the most outstanding performances of these equipment.
5.2
RECOMMENDATION
The equipment complies with the following international standards: EN 301 4894 for EMC EN 302 217 for all frequency bands ITUR recommendations for all frequency bands EN 300 1322 characteristics for power supply EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3) EN 60950 for safety
5.3
APPLICATION
Equipment main applications are: Radio links inside GSM cells of mobile radio networks Radio links for voice and data transmission LAN Ethernet extension Spur routes for high capacity radio systems Emergency links.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
21
5.4
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The ALS PDH equipment consists of two separate units available in different versions: indoor unit called IDU for rack or 19 structure mounting that interfaces the input/output tributaries and supervises the full equipment outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting where the circuit forming the RF head take place.
The two units are interconnected via coaxial cable. Following figures show different ODU units and most representative IDU units: Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU, pole mounting and integrated antenna Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports Fig.9 - 1+1 Compact IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity and 3x10/100BaseT ports Fig.10 - 1+1 Modular IDU Plus, up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity Fig.11 - 1+1 Modular IDU Plus, up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus, Nodal with matrix and up to 8x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity Fig.13 - 1+1 Compact IDU Plus, up to 32x2 Mbit/s capacity and 3x10/100BaseT capacity
IDU units are available in the following versions: Modular IDU Compact IDU Modular IDU PLUS Compact IDU PLUS.
5.4.1
Modular IDU
The Modular IDU is madeup in the following versions: 1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s 1+0/1+1, 2 unit high, capacity 32x2 Mbit/s 1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 34/2x34 Mbit/s 1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 4x2 Mbit/s + 3x10/100BaseT 1+0/1+1, 1unit high, capacity 16x2 Mbit/s + 4x10/100BaseT (with 32 Mbit/s max capacity).
The IDU consists of LIM, CONTROLLER, RIM modules, plugin inserted into a wired shelf. In the 1+0 compact version LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM functions are integrated in a single module. Following functionality description covers both 1+0 compact and 1+0/1+1 standard versions. The LIM interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator. Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive side in the 1+1 version. The RIM contains: the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM in alternative; the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and send the battery voltage towards the ODU; the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting cable.
22
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
The Controller performs the following: interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given in the system technical specification) contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functionality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment.
5.4.2
Compact IDU unit
The Compact IDU unit is available in the following versions: 1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8xE1 1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8/16xE1 1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8xE1 1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8/16xE1 1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8xE1 + 3ETH 1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8xE1 + 3ETH 1 unit, 1+1, 16xE1 + 3ETH.
The Ethernet module V12252 can be housed inside the IDU, as option, for the Ethernet traffic. The compact IDUs are made by a single card plugged into a cabled rack. The line interfaces contain the connections of the tributaries and, by means of processes of multiplexing/ demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/ demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception side. The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to the relay contacts.
5.4.3
Modular IDU Plus
The Modular IDU Plus is made up of the following versions: terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32xE1 capacity, 1 unit high terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32/42/53xE1 capacity, 2 unit high terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/24xE1 + 4x10/100BaseT, 1 unit high drop-insert 1+0, 1+1, 4x(1+0), up to 4x53xE1 capacity, that is passthrough up to 212xE1 streams plus drop-insert up to 32xE1 or up to 53xE1 or up to 79xE1 with STM1+16xE1 interface, equipped with matrix into 2 units nodal, up to 3xModular IDU Plus can be joined in a mode giving full switching capabilities to all the E1 streams coming from max 12 directions. Any direction can contain max 53xE1.
1 unit Modular IDU Plus consists of LIM 32E1, Eq. Controller, RIM plug-in inserted into a wired shelf. 2 unit Modular IDU Plus consists of Eq. Controller modules, LIM 32E1 or Matrix with 32E1, or Matrix with STM1 and 16E1, one Processor for two ODU.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
23
The LIM module interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator and duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive side in the 1+1 version. The Matrix and the processor perform LIM Plus drop/insert of each E1 stream coming from/to 4 directions (12 direction for a Nodal configuration). The RIM contains: the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM; the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and send the battery voltage towards the ODU the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting cable.
The Controller performs the following: interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, E1 WS (details are given in the system technical specification) contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functionality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment.
5.4.4
IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)
The IDU Plus Compact unit is available in the following hardware versions: 1 unit for IDU Plus compact rack, configuration 1+0, 2/4/8/16/32xE1 + 3ETH 1 unit for IDU Plus compact rack, configuration 1+1, 2/4/8/16/32xE1 + 3ETH
The compact IDU Plus are made by a single card. The line interfaces contain the connections of the tributaries and, by means of processes of multiplexing/ demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/ demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception side. The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to the relay contacts.
5.4.5
ODU
The ODU unit contains circuits that permit to interface from one side the IDU and the antenna from the other side. The QAM modulated carrier is shifted to RF frequency bands through a double conversion. Similarly it occurs at the receive side to send the IF converted carrier to the demodulator within the IDU. The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS. The ODU AS is also called Universal because it can be used as SDH ODU in Siae ALS (SIAE SDH link family). Antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or unbalanced hybrid system.
24
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
5.5
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
AL different equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via a dedicated application software called SCT/LCT running on PC. It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows and so on.
5.5.1
Hardware platform
The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following characteristics: microprocessor Pentium 133 MHz 32 Mbyte RAM windows compatible graphic monitor floppy drive 1.44 Mb HD with 50 Mbyte of free space Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP.
5.5.2
Management ports
The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports: Q3 (Ethernet LAN 10BaseT) RS232 (asynchronous serial line) LCT (USB) Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame. Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals.
5.5.3
Protocols
SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25
Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna
LIM MODULE
RIM1 MODULE
RIM 1 FAIL 1 UNITA' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 REM TEST 11 R 12 TX RX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE 13 14 15 16 RIM 2
IDU ODU
RIM 1 RIM 2
IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s CONTROLLER MODULE RIM2 MODULE
Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity
+ +
10-100 BaseT
DPX FAIL
48V RIM 1 RIM 2
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16 A Q3
1 IDU ODU R REM TEST
2 TX RX 1 2 CH1
LINK ACT WAY SIDE
+
48V
RIM 1 RIM 2
+
10 11 12 PS1 PS2
+
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity with 4x10/100BaseT ports
DPLX LINK 1 ACT TXRX TEST 1 R AL 2
DPLX DPLX LINK 2 LINK 3 ACT ACT 10/100 BTX
7 1
13
14 2
15
16 1 2
Q3
LCT
USER IN/OUT
48V1
+
48V2
Fig.9 - Compact IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s with 3x10/100BaseT ports
26
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Q3/2
Q3/1 A
IDU ODU R REM TEST CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
WAY SIDE
+
FAIL
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24
Trib: 25-32
FAIL Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53
Fig.10 - Modular IDU PLUS 1+0/1+1 - up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity
10-100 BaseT
DPX FAIL
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24 Q3/2 Q3/1 A
1 IDUODU R REM TEST
LINK ACT WAY SIDE
+ +
48V WAY SIDE
+
48V 2Mb/s
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH1
CH2
Fig.11 - Modular IDU Plus 1+1 - up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports
Q3/2
Q3/1 A
+
FAIL 48V FAIL
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
NBUS
ON
ON
+
FAIL
DPX 2 10/100 BaseT 1 PS 1 2 2 2 48VDC 3 ACT LINK
Trib: 1-8
2MHz
STM1
Trib: 9-16
Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus nodal with matrix - up to 16x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity
V11
RS232
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32 1
TEST R AL
TX RX 1 2 Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A 250VAC
- 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
Fig.13 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
27
EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
-
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
see attachment see attachment see attachment see attachment see attachment see attachment see attachment Coherent see attachment see attachment see attachment see attachment BER10-3 see attachment see attachment see attachment
Frequency range RF channelling Goreturn frequency Antenna configuration Frequency stability Spurious transmission Modulation Demodulation Output power Rx threshold Additional losses in Tx and Rx for 1+1 version BER Max RF level in Rx for Power supply Consumption
6.2
-
SERVICE CHANNELS
Capacity of the service channels in the Modular IDU. The following service channels are available for each type of configuration: version 1+0/1+1 - 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2, 34, 2x34 Mbit/s (1 unit) Three service channels available subdivided as follows: interface V28 data channel 1x9600 with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or data channel sync./ async. RS232C 9600 baud co/contradirectional interface V11 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater or equal to 16x2 Mbit/s
version 1+0/1+1 high capacity - 32x2 Mbit/s (2 units) Three service channels: interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or data channel syncr./async. RS232C 9600 baud V11 co/contradirectional 64 kbit/s interface 2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater than 16xE1
28
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
version 1+0/1+1 AL Ethernet 100 Mbit/s Modular (1 unit) Three service channels: interface V.28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party or 2x4800 baud or data channel sync./async. RS232C 9600 baud 2 x interfaces 2 Mbit/s wayside available on LIM as tributary 3 and 4.
Capacity of the (optional) service channels in the IDU Compact The following capacity of the service channel is available 1+0/1+1 - version 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s (1 unit) One service channel is available: interface 64 kbit/s V11 co/contradirectional 1+0/1+1 version 3xEthernet + 16x2 Mbit/s, no service channel
Capacity of the service channel in the Modular IDU Plus Three service channels are available: interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 or synchronous (or asynchronous) data channel V11 64 kbit/s contradirectional or 64 kbit/s codirectional interface 2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater or equal to 16xE1 (only for hierarchic capacities).
Capacities of the service channels for the IDU Compact Plus Two service channels are available: V11 and RS232 V11 or, in alternative, V28 interface; V11 64 kbit/s contradirectional or codirectional interface; interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or V.24 9600 baud synchronous (or asynchronous) data channel RS232 PPP interface for forwarding of the supervision signal
an additional external EOW module is available, connected to the IDU Compact Plus to the ports V11 and RS232.
6.3
-
TRANSMISSION CAPACITY
Transmission capacity Modular IDU LIM 16xE1/2xE3 LIM 4xE1+3ETH LIM 16xE1+4ETH LIM D/I 64 Mbit/s 104 Mbit/s (see Tab.2) 104 Mbit/s (see Tab.2) up to 64 Mbit/s in ring with D/I up to 16xE1 Tab.2 - Ethernet traffic capacity according to the number of used E1
Capacity/modulation
Channel spacing (MHz)
Used E1 2 1 4 2
Available Ethernet band (Mbit/s) 2 4 4 8
4 Mbit/s 4QAM
3.5
8 Mbit/s 16QAM
3.5
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
29
8 Mbit/s 4QAM
4 2 4 4 4+1 1 4+1 1 4+1 1 2 4
2 8 8 16 8 16 24 32 24 32 56 64 100 95
16 Mbit/s 16QAM 16 Mbit/s 4QAM 32 Mbit/s 16QAM 32 Mbit/s 4QAM 64 Mbit/s 16QAM 100 Mbit/s 32QAM 100 Mbit/s 32QAM -
7 14 14 28 28 28 28
Transmission capacity Compact IDU Compact IDU up to 16xE1 Compact IDU up to 16xE1+3ETH 32 Mbit/s 64 Mbit/s
Transmission capacity (Compact Modular IDU Plus) Up to 53x2 Mbit/s with or without Ethernet traffic see Tab.3
Tab.3 - Transmission capacity Modular IDU Plus Capacity 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 5x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 5x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 10x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 10x2 Mbit/s 16x2 Mbit/s 21x2 Mbit/s 16x2 Mbit/s 21x2 Mbit/s 32x2 Mbit/s 42x2 Mbit/s 53x2 Mbit/s Modulation 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM Channelling 3,5 MHz Size 1RU
7 MHz
1RU
14 MHz
1RU
28 MHz
1RU
28 MHz
2RU
Transmission capacity (Compact IDU Plus) Up to 53x2 Mbit/s with or without Ethernet traffic 105 Mbit/s
30
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
6.4
POWER SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

see attachment see Tab.4 Tab.4 - IDU consumption IDU type AL Compact 1RU AL Compact 1RU AL Compact PLUS AL Compact PLUS AL Modular 1RU AL Modular 1RU AL Modular 2RU AL Modular 2RU AL Modular 2RU AL Modular Plus 1RU AL Modular Plus 2RU D&I 32xE1 AL Plus, 2RU, 53xE1 Compact Plus 1RU 32xE1 +3ETH Configuration 1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 2x(1+0) 1+0 1+1 2x(1+0) 4x(1+0) 1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 Dissipation (W) 11 12 13 16 17 22 21 25 28 17 23 35 45 25 35 13 18
Terminal fully equipped power consumption IDU consumption
Fuses for Modular IDU as protection of power supply circuits of whole equipment, there is a F1 fuse on the RIM PCB behind front panel. The fuse characteristics are: Nominal current Nominal voltage Type Dimensions 3A 125 Vdc/ac timed 6.10 mm x 2.59 mm
Fuses for IDU Plus as protection of power supply circuits of whole equipment, there is a F1 fuse on the RIM PCB behind front panel. The fuse characteristics are: Nominal current Nominal voltage Type Dimensions 3A 125 Vdc/ac timed 6.10 mm x 2.59 mm
Fuses for Compact IDU On the IDU Compact front panel there are fuses with following characteristics: Nominal current Nominal voltage Type Dimensions 3.15A 250 Vdc/ac Medium timed 5 mm x 20 mm
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
31
Fuses for IDU Compact Plus Nominal current Nominal voltage Type Dimensions
On the IDU Compact Plus front panel there are fuses with following characteristics: 3.15A 250 Vdc/ac Medium timed 5 mm x 20 mm
Environmental conditions IDU operating range ODU operating range IDU survival temperature range ODU survival temperature range ODU operating humidity ODU operating humidity ODU dissipation Wind speed Storage conditions from -5 to +45 C from -33 to +55C from -10C to +55 C from -40C to +60C 95% at +35C in accordance with IP65 thermal resistance0.5C/W solar heat gain 5C 220 km/h according to T.1.2 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (weather protected, not temperature cpntrolled storage locations)
Tab.5 - Guaranteed current absorbition for power supply connector Configuration Modular IDU High capacity Modular IDU Compact IDU IDU PLus Compact IDU Plus Technical characteristics Imax 1.13 A 1.23 A 1A 1.25 A 1.20 A see Tab.6 Tab.6 - IDU/ODU dimensions Width (mm) ODU AL 1+0 ODU AL 1+1 ODU AS 1+0 ODU AS 1+1 IDU Modular 1+0/1+1, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mb/s IDU Modular 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s IDU Modular 2+0 east/west repeater IDU Modular Plus 32E1 IDU Modular Plus 53E1 IDU Modular Plus drop-insert IDU Compact 1+0/1+1 IDU Compact Plus 1+0/1+1 Weight 254 278 254 358 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 refer to Tab.7 Height (mm) 254 254 254 254 45 90 90 45 90 90 45 45 Depth (mm) 114 296 121 296 270 270 270 270 270 270 213 270
32
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.7 - IDU/ODU weight ODU AL 1+0 ODU AL 1+1 ODU AS 1+0 ODU AS 1+1 IDU Modular 1+0/1+1, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mbit/s IDU Modular 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s IDU Modular 2+0 east/west repeater IDU Compact 1+0/1+1 IDU Compact Plus 1+0/1+1 Panning system 1+0/1+1 Mechanical layout 4.5 kg 13.3 kg 5.5 kg 15.3 kg 3.5/3.7 kg 3.5/3.7 kg 3.7 kg 2.5/2.6 kg 2.5/2.6 kg 4.4 kg refer to typical Fig.14 to Fig.33.
FAIL 1 UNITA' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 11 10 12 IDU ODU TX RX 1 A R 2 REM TEST 13 14 15 16 WAY SIDE CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
RIM 1 RIM 2
RIM 1 RIM 2
IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s
Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU Modular configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors
+ +
A FAIL
DPLX LINK ACT
DPLX LINK ACT 10/100 BTX TX RX R 1 2
DPLX LINK ACT
RIM 1 RIM 2
IDU ODU A Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 REM TEST
WAY SIDE
+ +
RIM 1 RIM 2
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU Modular Ethernet tributary connectors
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s FAIL
1 RIM 2 RIM
1 UNITA'
Trib: A-B-C-D
Trib: E-F-G-H
LCT
USER IN/OUT
RS232
Trib: I-J-K-L IDUODU TX RX 1 A R 2 Q3 REM TEST
Trib: M-N-O-P WAY SIDE CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
RIM 1 RIM 2
Fig.16 - 1+1 IDU Modular D type tributary connectors
+ +
1 FAIL
2 RIM 1 RIM 2 IDU ODU A Q3 R REM TEST TX RX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
RIM 1 RIM 2
+ +
LCT
USER IN/OUT
RS232
Fig.17 - 1+1 Modular IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
33
RIM 1 FAIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RIM 2
RIM 1 RIM 2
+ + +
FAIL 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A Q3
IDU ODU R REM TEST
TX RX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
LCT
USER IN/OUT
RS232
Fig.18 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s RIM 1 FAIL RIM 2
Trib: 1-2-3-4 2Mb/s
Trib: 5-6-7-8 2Mb/s
Trib: 9-10-11-12 2Mb/s
Trib: 13-14-15-16 2Mb/s
RIM 1 RIM 2
FAIL Trib: 17-18-19-20 Trib: 21-22-23-24 Trib: 25-26-27-28 Trib: 29-30-31-32
A Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT RS232
IDU ODU R REM TEST
TX RX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
Fig.19 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration D type tributary connectors
FAIL
+
WAY SIDE
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16 Q3/2 Q3/1
Trib: 17-24 IDU ODU A R REM TEST CH1
Trib: 25-32
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.20 - IDU Modular Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s
Q3/2
Q3/1 A
WAY SIDE
+
FAIL
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
NBUS
ON
ON FAIL
FAIL
Fig.21 - IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodal 4+0
Q3/2
Q3/1 A
WAY SIDE
+
FAIL
+
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT
+
FAIL
Trib: 1-8
2MHz
STM1
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24
Trib: 25-32
Trib: 33-40
Trib: 41-48
Trib: 49-53
Fig.22 IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)
Trib. 1234
Q3 TEST R AL
LCT
USER IN/OUT
48V PS
Trib. 5678 +
Fig.23 - IDU Compact 1+0 (2x2/4x2 Mbit/s)
34
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Trib. 1234
Trib. 9101112
Q3 TX RX TEST R AL 1 2
LCT
USER IN/OUT 1 Trib. 5678 Trib. 13141516 +
48V1 PS1
48V2 1 2
2 PS2 +
Fig.24 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)
DPLX LINK 1 ACT TEST R AL TXRX 1 2
DPLX DPLX 2 3 LINK LINK ACT ACT 10/100 BTX
7 1
10
11
12 PS1 PS2
+
13
14 2
15
16 1 2
Q3
LCT
USER IN/OUT
48V1
+
48V2
Fig.25 - IDU Compact 1+1 (coax. connector up to 16x2 Mbit/s) + Ethernet module
V11
RS232
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32 1 2 10/100 BaseT 1 PS 1 2 3
DPX ACT LINK
TEST R AL
2 2 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
- 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
Fig.26 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)
V11
RS232
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32 1 2 10/100 BaseT 1 PS 1 2 3
DPX ACT LINK
TEST R AL
2 2 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
- 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
Fig.27 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)
Fig.28 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
35
Fig.29 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna
Fig.30 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)
36
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.31 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
37
Fig.32 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)
38
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.33 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
39
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT
7.1
GENERAL
The following IDU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from 5 C to +45 C.
7.2
TRIBUTARY INTERFACE
7.2.1
Input side
Bit rate Line code
2 Mbit/s interface
2048 kbit/s 50 ppm HDB3 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz 18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz 14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz 6 dB according to
Rated impedance Rated level Return loss
Max attenuation of the input cable Accepted jitter Transfer function Connector type
f trend
see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823 see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742 1.0/2.3, SUBD 25 pins, SCSI 50 pin
Output side
Bit rate Rated impedance Rated level Output jitter Pulse shape Connector type 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm in accordance with G.742/G.823 see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703 1.0/2.3, SUBD 25 pins, SCSI 50 pin
40
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7.2.2
Input side
Bit rate Line code
34 Mbit/s interface
34368 kbit/s 20 ppm HDB3 75 Ohm 1.0 Vp/75 Ohm 12 dB from 860 kHz to 17200 kHz 18 dB from 17200 kHz to 34368 kHz 14 dB from 34368 kHz to 51550 kHz 12 dB at 17184 kHz according to
Max attenuation of the input cable Accepted jitter Transfer function Connector type
f trend
see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823 in accordance with G.823 1.0/2.3
Output side
Bit rate Rated impedance Output jitter Rated level Pulse shape Connector type 34368 kbit/s 20 ppm 75 Ohm 0.3 U.I. from 0 Hz to 800 kHz 0.05 U.I. from 10 kHz to 800 kHz 1.0 Vp/75 Ohm see mask in Figure 17, CCITT Rec. G.703 1.0/2.3
7.2.3
-
Ethernet interface
IEEE 802.3 (10/100BaseT connector RJ45, 100/1000BaseX connector LC) MAC switching MAC learning MAC Aging IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1x Flow Control IEEE 802.1p QoS IPV4 ToS IP-V6 TC/DSCP
Ethernet characteristics Ethernet switch functionalities
7.3
STM-1 INTERFACE
The STM-1 interface can be specialized for different applications, by simply equipping the STM-1 interface with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Electric interface has 1.0/2.3 connectors. Information about the presence/absence and type of transceiver is transferred to the main controller. The characteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarized in the Tab.8.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
41
Tab.8 - Optical interface characteristics Interface Ref. Launched power (dBm) 0 ... -5 0 ... -5 -8 ... -15 -14 ... -20 Minimum Operating Transceiver sensitivity wavelength (dBm) -34 -34 -28 -28 1480-1580 1263-1360 1263-1360 1263-1360 Laser Laser Laser Led Fibre SingleMode SingleMode SingleMode MultiMode Distance (km) Up to 80 Up to 40 Up to 15 Up to 2
L-1.2 L-1.1 S-1.1 I-1
G.957 G.957 G.957 ANSI
The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.
7.3.1
Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface
Input side
Bit rate Line code Rated impedance Rated level Return loss Max attenuation of the input cable 155520 kbit/s 4,6 ppm CMI 75 ohm 1 Vpp 0,1 V 15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz 12,7 dB at 78 MHz ( f law)
Output side
Bit rate Rated level Pulse shape 155520 kbit/s 4,6 ppm 1 Vpp 0,1 V see mask of Figure 24 and 25 of ITU-T Rec. G.703
42
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7.4
SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE
7.4.1
Input side
Bit rate Line code
2 Mbit/s wayside interface
2048 kbit/s 50 ppm HDB3 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz 18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz 14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz 6 dB according to
Max attenuation of the input cable Accepted jitter Transfer function Connector
f trend
see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823 see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742 RJ45 (in/out in commun)
Output side
Bit rate Rated impedance Rated level Pulse shape Output jitter Connector 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703 in accordance with G.742/G.823 RJ45 (in/out in commun)
7.4.2
Tolerance Coding
64 kbit/s codirectional interface

100 ppm synch + data + octet as per G.703 120 Ohm 3 dB at 128 kHz see CCITT Rec. G.703 1 Vp/120 Ohm 0.1 V see tables at par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703 RJ45
Impedance Max attenuation of the input cable User side Input/output level
Return loss Connector
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
43
7.4.3
Tolerance
64 kbit/s contradirectional interface V.11

100 ppm contradirectional clock and data on independent wires see Rec. CCITT V.11 RJ45
Equipment side Coding Electrical interface Connector
7.4.4
-
Analogue interface
as per Recc. G.712 from 14 dBr to +1 dBr/600 Ohm from 11 dBr to +4 dBr/600 Ohm
Electrical characteristics Input level Output level
7.4.5
-
9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data

RS232 CCITT Rec. V.28 9600 baud DTR, DSR, DCD RJ45
Data interface Electrical interface Input speed Control wires Connector
7.4.6
-
9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data

CCITT Rec. V.28 4800 or 9600 bit/s V.28 RJ45
Electrical interface Input speed Electrical interface Connector
7.4.7
Alarm interface
User output
44 Relay contacts Open contacts Rmin Closed contacts Rmax Switching voltage Vmax Switching current Imax Connector normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) 100 Mohm at 500 Vdc 0.5 Ohm 100 V 1A SUB-D 9 pin
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
User input
Equivalent circuit recognized as a closed contact Equivalent circuit recognized as an open contact Connector 200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to ground 60 kOhm (min) referred to ground SUB-D 9 pin
7.4.8
Network Management Interface
RJ45 interface
LAN type Connector Connection to LAN Protocol Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT RJ45 direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair TCP/IP or IPoverOSI
BNC interface
LAN type Connector Connection to LAN Protocol Ethernet thinnet 802.3 10Base2 BNC RG58 coax. cable 50 Ohm TCP/IP or IPoverOSI
RS232 interface
Electrical interface Asynchronous baud rate Protocol V.28 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 PPP
LCT RS232 interface

Electrical interface Asynchronous baud rate Protocol V.28 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 PPP
LCT USB interface

Electrical interface Baud rate Protocol USB 1.1 version 1.5 Mbit/s PPP
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
45
7.5
-
MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR
Carrier IF mo-demodulating frequency Tx side Rx side 330 MHz 140 MHz 4QAM/16QAM/32QAM BCM from 4 Mbit/s to 106 Mbit/s depending on different capacities 5 taps 2.5 dB at 106 1 dB at 103
Type of modulation Type of coding Modulating signal Equalization Coding gain
7.6
-
CABLE INTERFACE
single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx ODU AL: 370 m 4/16/32QAM ODU AS: 300 m 4/16/32QAM 50 Ohm
Interconnection with the ODU unit Cable length Rated impedance Signal running along the cable Tx nominal frequency Rx nominal frequency Transceiver management signals Remote power supply
330 MHz 140 MHz 388 kbit/s bidirectional direct from battery voltage
7.7
AVAILABLE LOOPS
The following loop are available within the IDU: line tributary loop internal tributary loop baseband loop IDU loop.
46
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES
8.1
1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU VERSION
Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM module the Modular IDU consists of.
8.1.1
LIM
The LIM performs the following operations: multiplexing process of the input tributaries aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM modulator takes place within the RIM duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated version the changeover occurs at tributary level.
Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/ demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.
8.1.2
Tx side
Circuit description
Refer to Fig.34. The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries. Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows: Fig.35 2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation and generates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. Fig.36 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. Fig.37 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a 8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. Fig.38 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
47
Fig.39 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. Fig.40 32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two LIMs (master and slave) each of one manipulating two 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure as per Recc. G.751. The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the master LIM for aggregation and stuffing process. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. Fig.41 2x34 Mbit/s multiplexing. The two 34368 kbit/s tributaries are directly sent to the Bit Insertion for aggregation and stuffing process. Opposite situation occurs at the Rx side.
In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service signals interfaced by Controller module. The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation occurring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented: Tab.9 - Aggregate frame Version 2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 16x2/34 Mbit/s 32x2/2x34 Mbit/s Aggregate frame 2430 kbit/s 4860 kbit/s 9720 kbit/s 19440 kbit/s 38880 kbit/s 77760 kbit/s
The aggregate frame contains: the main signal from the MUX(s) the framed service signal from the service MUX the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment the frame alignment word the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0 at 38.88 MHz The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.34) of the modulating signal to be sent to the mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM. The digital process includes: serial to parallel conversion differential encoding generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.
Rx side
Refer to Fig.42. From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing:
48
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
clock recovery frequency and phase carrier locking baseband equalisation and filtering bit polarity decision differential decoding parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve: BER estimate measurement radio performances
HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken directly from CRC circuit before FEC correction. The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a logic circuit according with Tab.10. The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic synchronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines. Tab.10 - Switching priority Priority Highest | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Lowest Levels Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Priority 6 Priority 7 Priority 8 Description RIM PSU Alarm Manual forcing (from main controller) Cable Short Alarm Cable Open Alarm IF Unit Alarm Demodulator Failure Base Band Unit Failure Alarm ODU Unit Failure ODU PSU Alarm VCO Failure Alarm High BER >103 (or 104 or 105, selectable by software) Low BER > 106 (or 107 or 108, selectable by software) Early Warning BER > 109 (or 1010 or 1011 or 1012, selectable by software) RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99 dBm) CRC Pulse Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
49
8.1.3
RIM
Refer to Fig.43. The RIM consists of the following main circuits: IF part of the QAM modulator IF part of the QAM demodulator power supply telemetry IDU/ODU
8.1.3.1
QAM modulator
I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits: recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process 330 MHz local oscillator a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with ODU.
8.1.3.2
QAM demodulator
At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM demodulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.
8.1.3.3
Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V. Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
8.1.3.4
Telemetry IDU/ODU
The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.
50
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
8.1.4
CONTROLLER
The controller module performs the following: interfaces the service signals houses the equipment software for equipment management interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment.
Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.
8.1.4.1
Service signals
The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options: 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232 synchronous/asynchronous channels 64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional 2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.
The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.
8.1.4.2
Equipment software
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers. The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.44.
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following: Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.45 for details. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following: LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI USB port for 1+0 version RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then controlling the users ID and relevant password. Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration parameters. Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual forcing etc...). Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
51
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828. Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be used. Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
8.1.4.3
Supervision ports
The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports. The following are made available: LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600 LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the supervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.
8.2
IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.46.
8.2.1
Tributary loop
Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The Tx line transmission is still on.
Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
8.2.2
Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.
52
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
8.2.3
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
NRZ D/A I&Q to RIM1 CK D/A to RIM2 I&Q BI: - main traffic - services - EOC - FEC - FAW Digital MOD - S/P convertion - diff. encoding - modulating signal generation X0 38.88 MHz Frame generator
IDU loop
2/34 Mbit/s G.703
Code converter
nx2 . . . nx34 - FSK mod/demod - 388 frame generator/receiver
MUX NRZ 2/2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2 Code converter CK 32x2/2x34 see Fig.23 through Fig.29
NRZ Code converter CK
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connected to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz to 140 MHz.
Fig.34 - LIM block diagram Tx side
2 Mbit/s only (16x2/34 or wayside higher speed
to/from main controller
services synchr.
Controller module
Service channel module
53
Aggregate Ck
Ck 2/34 Mbit/s MUX proprietary frame B.I. Tx data Ck 2/34 Mbit/s DEMUX proprietary frame B.E. Rx data
Fig.35 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing
Aggregate Ck
Ck 2x2 Mbit/s MUX proprietary frame B.I. Tx data
Ck 2x2 Mbit/s DEMUX proprietary frame B.E. Rx data
Fig.36 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s Ck MUX 2 ->8 G.742 B.I. Framed data 8448 Tx Ck DEMUX 2 ->8 G.742 B.E. Framed data 8448 Rx
4x2 Mbit/s
54
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s Ck MUX 2 ->8 G.742 Data B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s Framed data 8448 Tx Data
MUX 2 ->8 G.742
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 -> 2 G.742
Ck 8448 kHz Tx Data B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 -> 2 G.742 Framed data 8448 Rx

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
55
2 Mbit/s wayside 4x2 Mbit/s
Stuffing
Aggregate Ck
MUX 2 ->8 G.742
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 ->8 G.742
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 ->8 G.742 Ck 8448 kHz Tx 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 ->8 G.742 Framed data 8448 kbit/s Tx 2 Mbit/s wayside Destuffing 4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 ->2 G.742 4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 ->2 G.742
Ck 34368 kHz Tx Framed data 34368 kbit/s
MUX 8->34 G.751
Aggregate Ck
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 ->2 G.742 Ck 8448 kHz 4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 ->2 G.742 Framed data 8448 kbit/s Tx
Ck 34368 kHz Framed data 34368 kbit/s
MUX 34->8 G.751
56
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 set of 16x2 Mbit/s 8448 k Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2
Aggregate Ck
2 Mbit/s interface
Mux 2->8 8448 k Demux 8->2 Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2 Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2 8448 k
Mux Demux 8->34 34->8
34368 k BI/BE
77600 kbit/s
8448 k
LIM Master
2 set of 16x2 Mbit/s Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2 8448 k
2 Mbit/s interface
Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2 Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2 Mux 2->8 Demux 8->2
8448 k
8448 k
Mux Demux 8->34 34->8
34368 k
8448 k
LIM Slave
Fig.40 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing
Aggregate Ck
34368 k 77600 kbit/s 34368 k BI/BE
Fig.41 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
57
58
BER meas. P.M. FEC CRC analysis & aligner 2/34 Mbit/s G.703 Code converter SW logic BE BER extimates High BER Low BER EW DEMUX 2/2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2 32x2/2x34 See Fig.23 through Fig. 29 Code converter nx2 or nx34 Mbit/s Code converter from main P switch controls same as above Services Service channel DEMUX Controller module
I&Q from RIM1
Ck recovery Carrier lock Equaliz. & filt. Decision Diff. decod. S/P
Fig.42 - LIM block diagram Rx side
I&Q from RIM2
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

from LIM I&Q 330 MHz QAM MOD (IF part) 5.5 MHz to LIM from LIM 17.5 MHz Cable interface Remote power supply Overcurrent protect.
Fig.43 - RIM block diagram

DC battery -48 V DC Step down I&Q to LIM DEM QAM (IF part) Cable equaliz.
I/V protect
+3.6 V
-5 V
59
60
LAN LCT User In
RS232
Alarm/ User Out
Main controller
EOC
388 kbit/s generator receiver
Fig.44 - Main and peripheral controller connection
FSK modem
FSK modem
FSK modem
388 kbit/s
FSK modem
388 kbit/s
Peripheral controller
388 kb/s gen/rec. ODU1
338 kb/s gen/rec. ODU2
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
APPLICATION
SOFTWARE
Applic./present. session layers Transport layer
SNMP
TCP/UDP
Routing layer
IPoverOSI IP IS-IS ISO 10589
Data link layer
PPP
PPP
LLC MAC
LAPD Q921
LCC MAC
Physical layer
RS232
EOC
Ethernet LAN
EOC
Ethernet LAN
Fig.45 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
61
62
LIM
RIM
Trib. IN MUX BI BB loop 330 DEMUX BE Trib. rem. loop MOD
330 MHz to ODU
Fig.46 - IDU loopback
Trib. OUT
140
IDU loop
Trib. loc. loop
DEM 140 MHz from ODU
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH LIM ETHERNET (2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET TRAFFIC)
Description that follows covers indoor unit with Ethernet ports, 1+0/1+1 Modular version. Paragraph 9.1.1 LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries deals with 2 Mbit/s signals and paragraph 9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic deals with Ethernet traffic treatment. LIM Ethernet contains all the circuits of LIM with 2 Mbit/s interfaces plus some specific circuits for Ethernet interface.
9.1
1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU
Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules contained into IDU.
9.1.1
LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries
The LIM Ethernet performs the following operations: multiplexing process of the input tributaries aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM modulator takes place within the RIM duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated version the changeover occurs at tributary level concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams connection between a local LAN port and a remote LAN port.
9.1.2
Tx side
Circuit description
The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries. In the following are described different multiplations:
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
63
2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation and generates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a 8448 kbit/ s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side. 32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two multiplexers of 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure as per Recc. G.751. The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the LIM for aggregation and stuffing process. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service signals interfaced by Controller module. The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation occurring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented: Tab.11 - Aggregate frame Version 2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 4 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 16 Mbit/s 32 Mbit/s 64 Mbit/s The aggregate frame contains: the main signal from the MUX(s) the framed service signal from the service MUX the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment the frame alignment word the bits dedicated to the FEC. Aggregate frame 2430 kbit/s 4860 kbit/s 4860 kbit/s 9720 kbit/s 19440 kbit/s 38880 kbit/s 77760 kbit/s
The LIM also includes the processing in digital form of the modulating signal to be sent to the mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM. The digital process includes: serial to parallel conversion differential encoding generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.
64
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Rx side
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing: clock recovery frequency and phase carrier locking baseband equalisation and filtering bit polarity decision differential decoding parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken directly from CRC circuit before FEC correction. The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a logic circuit according with Tab.12. The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic synchronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines. Tab.12 - Switching priority Priority Highest | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Lowest Levels Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Priority 6 Priority 7 Priority 8 High BER >10
3
Description RIM PSU Alarm Manual forcing (from main controller) Cable Short Alarm Cable Open Alarm IF Unit Alarm Demodulator Failure Base Band Unit Failure Alarm ODU Unit Failure ODU PSU Alarm VCO Failure Alarm (or 104 or 105, selectable by software)
Low BER > 106 (or 107 or 108, selectable by software) Early Warning BER > 109 (or 1010 or 1011 or 1012, selectable by software) RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99 dBm) CRC Pulse Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
65
9.1.3
LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic
Two versions of LIM Ethernet are available. They only differs for interface number: LIM Ethernet LIM Ethernet 4x2 Mbit/s + 3x10/100BaseT 16x2 Mbit/s + 4x10/100BaseT
In the following Ethernet interface circuits are described. For the description of all the other circuits relative to 2 Mbit/s interface and the structure of LIM please refer to previous paragraph. LIM Ethernet is equipped with the following interfaces: electrical interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT IEEE 802.3 from 0 to 4x2 Mbit/s (E1) interface total capacity from 2 to 64 Mbit/s or 105 Mbit/s
Most important functions of LIM Ethernet are: concatenation of Ethernet traffic in 2 Mbit/s tributaries and relevant multiplation LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH (ITU X.86) for concatenated 2 Mbit/s switch between a local LAN port and the radio LAN port MAC switching MAC address learning MAC address aging Ethernet interface with autonegotiation 10/100, full duplex, half duplex Ethernet interface with Flow Control, Back Pressure, MDI/MDX crossover
network segmentation into the switch virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q (anyone from 0 to 4095 VID for a maximum of 64 memory location) (see Fig.52) layer 2 QoS, priority management as per IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.52) layer 3 ToS/DSCP (see Fig.54 and Fig.55) packet forwarding
A block diagram of LIM Ethernet module can be found into Fig.51. Into LIM Ethernet there is a switch with 3 external ports and 1internal ports. External ports are electrical Ethernet 10/100BaseT interfaces placed on the front panel. Internal port is connected to radio side stream. Ethernet traffic coming from external ports goes to internal port radio side. The radio side port is connected to one or two streams group of concatenated 2 Mbit/s. One stream for capacity up to 16x2 Mbit/s and two streams for capacity of 12 16 2 Mbit/s streams, plus other 16x2 Mbit/s streams in case of maximum capacity. In Tx side Ethernet traffic is packet into a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. The resulting stream is divided into the used number of 2 Mbit/s streams. The 2 Mbit/s streams are then multiplexed, like into standard LIM, together with 2 Mbit/s arriving from front panel, the resulting stream goes to the modulator, see Fig.51. In Rx the stream arriving from the demodulator is divided into the 2 Mbit/s streams, like into standard LIM, then the 2 Mbit/s not used into the front panel 2 Mbit/s are concatenated and sent to Ethernet circuits. Resulting stream, after LAPS protocol control, is sent to switch internal port.
9.1.3.1
2 Mbit/s tributaries
LIM Ethernet module uses the 16x2 Mbit/s mode of AL radio link. Tributary channels at 2 Mbit/s (E1) are connected to 8 coaxial connectors 1.0/2.3 into front panel. 2 Mbit/s streams are multiplexed as into standard LIM. From 0 to 16 2 Mbit/s tributaries can be selected to be used via SCT/LCT program, all the other available 2 Mbit/s are sent to switch internal port.
66
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
For 100 Mbit/s version can be selected up to 2 tributaries, position number 3 and 4 in tributary connectors are available for wayside connection (2 Mbit/s each).
9.1.3.2
Electrical Ethernet interface
The electrical Ethernet/Fast Ethernet interfaces are type IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT with RJ45 connector. For input or output signals at RJ45 please refer to chapter 19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS. Cable can be UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5. Standard coding: Ethernet 10 Mbit/s: Manchester Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s: MLT3 ternary
EMC/EMI protection: input and output pins are galvanically isolated through a transformer to reduce EMI every pin at RJ45 connector is terminated even if not used two signal lines are equipped with low capacity secondary protection to sustain residuals of possible electrostatic discharges (ESD). With LCT/SCT program it is possible to activate autonegotiation (speed/duplex/flow control) on 10/ 100BaseT interface.
9.1.3.3
Front panel LEDs
On FEM front panel there are a total of 6 Leds. There are 2 Leds for any Ethernet interface: DUPLEX: colour green, On = full duplex, OFF = half duplex LINK/ACT: colour green, ON = link up without activity, OFF = link down, BLINKING = link with activity on Rx and Tx.
9.1.3.4
Switch function
A radio link AL equipped with a LIM/Ethernet module can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages: to connect two separated LANs at a distance even greater than the maximum limits of 2.5 km (for Ethernet) to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than traffic in a single LAN.
The switch realized into LIM/Ethernet module is transparent (IEEE 802.1d and 802.q) into the same Vlan described by VLAN Configuration Table. It works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3 and it takes care to send traffic from a local LAN to another (Local or Remote). Routing is only on the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC. The operation is the following: when a LAN interface receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address, it decides which LAN to send it if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into local address table the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching) otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
67
The switch is very different from a Hub, which copies slavishly everything that receives from a line on all the others. The switch, in fact, acquires a frame, analyses it, reconstruct it and routes it and compensates also the different speeds of the interfaces, therefore an input can be at 100 Mbit/s and output at 10 Mbit/s. The mechanism is the following: from the moment of its activation, the switch examines all the frames that arrive it from different LANs, and on these basis it builds its routing tables progressively. In fact, every received frame allows to know on what LAN the sending station is located (MAC address learning). every frame that arrives to the switch is rebroadcasted: if the switch has the destination address into the routing table, sends the frame only into the corresponding LAN otherwise the frame is sent to all the LANs except the originating (flooding) as soon as the swicth increases its knowledge of different machines, the retransmission becomes more and more selective (and therefore more efficient)
the routing tables are updated every some minutes (programmable), removing addresses not alive in the last period (so, if a machine is moved, within a few minute it is addressed correctly) (MAC address aging).
The whole process is restricted to the ports which are members of the same Vlan as described into Vlan Configuration Table.
9.1.3.5
Ethernet Full Duplex function
The first realizations of the Ethernet network were on coaxial cable with the 10Base5 standard. According to this standard Ethernet interfaces (e.g. PC) are connected to the coaxial cable in parallel and are normally in receiving mode. Only one PC, at a certain time, transmits on the cable, the others are receiving, so this is half duplex mode, and only one PC uses the received message. Then the coaxial cable was progressively replaced by the pairs cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) as per 10BaseT standard. Normally there are four pairs into UTP Cat5 cable but two pairs are used with 10BaseT, one for Tx one for Rx. Into 10Base5 and 10BaseT standards, network protocols are the same the difference lays into the electrical interface. UTP cable is connected point to point between a hub and a Ethernet interface. Network structure is a star where the server is connected to a hub and from this a UTP cable is laid down for each Ethernet interface starts. The further step is to replace the hub with a more powerful equipment, e.g. a switch. In this case it is possible to activate transmission on both pairs at the same time, on one twisted pair for one direction, on the other pair for opposite direction. Thus we obtain full duplex transmission on UTP. Activating full duplex transmission it is possible to obtain a theoretical increase of performance of nearly 100%. Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation 100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.
9.1.3.6
Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled. If LLF is enabled an US radio alarm condition will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports at front panel. With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not available and can temporarily reroute the traffic.
9.1.3.7
MDI/MDIX crossover
The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by SCT program as MDI or MDIX to cross over between pairs so that external crossover cable is not required.
68
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
9.1.3.8
VLAN functionality
LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag for VLANs and QoS see Fig.52. The virtual LAN (VLAN) are logical separated subnets so that all the stations, into VLAN, seem to be into the same physical LAN segment even if they are geographically separated. The VLAN are used to separate traffic on the same physical LAN too. Station operating on the same physical LAN but on different VLAN work in separated mode thus they do not share broadcast and multicast messages. This results in a reduction of broadcast generated traffic and above all we get more security thanks to network separation. Tag position and structure are shown into Fig.52. Tag is made up with: a fixed word of 2 bytes 3 bits for priority according 802.1p 1 fixed bit 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according 802.1q.
Switch crossconnections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan Configuration Table has 64 position for Vlan ID range from 1 to 4095.
9.1.3.9
Switch organized by port
The switch can be organized on port basis treating both Tagged and Untagged packets in the same way. For each input port it is possible to define where to route the incoming traffic; one or more of the other ports can be Enabled to exit the incoming traffic. These types of connection are monodirectional. For a dibirectional connection between a generic Lan A and Lan B it is necessary to set the connection from Lan A to Lan B and from Lan B to Lan A. LIM Ethernet has external ports and one internal port, radio side. The internal switch can connect two or more ports together. Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. It is possible to select that a packet follows the description of Vlan Configuration Table for its Vlan ID. Another selection is to follow only Vlan Configuration Table. Packets can exit from a port as Unmodified or all Tagged either all Untagged. Unteggad packets will take default tags. For output operations there are 3 selections: unmodified: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged tagged: all the packets will exit tagged, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port. untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
9.1.3.10
Switch organized by VLAN ID
Vlan Configuration Table

Vlan Configuration Table defines a list of Vlan ID, For any Vlan ID some ports are members of Vlan others are not members. Ports members of a Vlan are allowed to receive and send packets with that Vlan. Switch dinamically assigns packets to the output port according their VLAN ID. Packets arent sent out to that port unless they belong to one of the Vlan of which the port is a member.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
69
The ports, from which the packet can be sent, are defined in the VLAN Table. The VLAN of incoming packet is filtered only if the parameter Ingress Filtering Check is set as Secure. After having filtered the ports from which packet can go out according to VALN Table, the control of packet and port Vlan membership MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.
Ingress Filtering Check

This is a process to check an incoming packet to compare its Valn ID to input ports Vlan membership. With Ingress Filtering Check it is possible to permit only to tagged packets to enter the switch. If the port is not member of the Vlan n. XX all the incoming packets with Vlan ID XX will be dropped. There are 3 option into Ingress Filtering Check to manage incoming packets: Disable: all Tagged and Untagged packets can transit into the switch following setting of switch organized by port. Fallback: Incoming packets without TAG 802.1q follow the rules of switch organized by port, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of switch organized by port. Secure: Incoming packets without TAG 802.1q cannot enter the switch, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table cannot enter the switch.
Operations at the input. At the input port the packet is received and a switching decision must be made. The switch analyses the Vlan ID (if present) and decides whether and where to forward the frame. If the received packet is untagged, the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port Lan per port settings. If the packet is tagged the switch check the other destination ports to find at least one with the same Vlan ID and put the packet into output port queue. If the Vlan ID is not listed into Vlan Configuration Table the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port Lan per port settings. Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. Operations at the output. For each output port there are the following selections for outgoing packets. Disable output port Enable unchanged: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged. Enable tagged: all the packets will exit tagged with Vlan ID specified into Vlan Configuration Table, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port. Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
9.1.3.11
Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p
Some services as voice overIP and videoconference have some time limits to work properly. A solution is to increase the priority of time sensitive packets. In this case random crowding coming from other services affects the delay of prioritized packets a lot less. Into LIM Ethernet module different priority of incoming packets is managed using Tag defined into IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.52). Every switch output port holds 4 output queues: queue 4 has highest priority, queue 0 has the lowest priority (see Fig.53). Priority can be organized by incoming port or by incoming priority tag: Priority by incoming port. For Untagged packets at each input ports it is decided to send the packets to one of the 4 queues of output ports defining which is the Default Priority Queue: Queue = 0, 1, 2, 3. For Tagged packets it is necessary to Disable Priority so they will go in the same queue of Untagged packets. Priority by incoming priority. For tagged packets for each priority tag (3 bits = for 7 priority levels) it is possible to define where to send the packets, into Queue from 0 to 3. Priority must be enable on 802.1p mode only or IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode and then 808.1q. For untagged packets the priority is defined only by incoming port..
70
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Outgoing packet policy at output ports can be WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) with fixed proportional output policy (8 packets from Queue 3, 4 from Queue 2, 4 from Queue 1, 1 from Queue 0) or Strict Priority that means that a queue completely empties before processing the next one.
9.1.3.12
Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IPV4 ToS (DSCP)
Only for IP packets it is possible to use incoming Layer 3 ToS (see Fig.54) to prioritize incoming packets. The 8 bits available can be read as 7 bits of ToS or 6 bits of DSCP as shown in Fig.55. According priority defined into ToS/DSCP the packet is sent into high priority queue low priority queue of output ports. With SCT/LCT program it is possible to select a different output queue for any ToS/DSCP priority level at each input port.
9.1.4
RIM
Refer to Fig.47. The RIM consists of the following main circuits: IF part of the QAM modulator IF part of the QAM demodulator power supply telemetry IDU/ODU.
9.1.4.1
QAM modulator
9.1.4.2
QAM demodulator
9.1.4.3
Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
71
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
9.1.4.4
Telemetry IDU/ODU
9.1.5
CONTROLLER
9.1.5.1
Service signals
The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing. For 100 Mbit/s version the following service channels are available: 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232 synchronous/asynchronous channels 2x2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 channels.
9.1.6
Equipment software
72
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following: Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.49 for details. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following: LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI USB port for 1+0 version RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then controlling the users ID and relevant password. Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration parameters. Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual forcing etc...). Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the alarm signalling on the LIM front panel. Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828. Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be used. Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
9.1.6.1
Supervision ports
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
73
9.2
IDU LOOPS
9.2.1
Tributary loop


9.2.2
Baseband unit loop
9.2.3
IDU loop
74
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
from LIM
I&Q
QAM MOD (IF part) 330 MHz
to LIM
5.5 MHz
from LIM
17.5 MHz
Cable interface
Remote power supply
Overcurrent protect. DC DC
battery -48 V
I/V protect
+3.6 V
Step down I&Q
-5 V
to LIM
DEM QAM (IF part)
Cable equaliz.
75
FSK modem
FSK modem
388 kbit/s
Alarm/ User Out
338 kb/s
User In
RS232
Main controller
LCT
388 kbit/s
gen/rec. ODU1
APPLICATION Applic./present. session layers Transport layer
SOFTWARE
SNMP
TCP/UDP
Routing layer
Data link layer
PPP
PPP
LLC MAC
LAPD Q921
LCC MAC
Physical layer
RS232
EOC
Ethernet LAN
EOC
Ethernet LAN
76
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
388 kb/s gen/rec.
FSK modem
FSK modem
LAN
EOC
ODU2
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
LIM
RIM 330 MHz BI MOD BB loop 330 DEMUX BE 140 IDU loop to ODU
Trib. IN MUX Trib. rem. loop
Trib. OUT
Trib. loc. loop
DEM
140 MHz from ODU
77
10/100BaseT
2 Mbit/s
PDH RADIO
Only for 32x2 Mbit/s version
MUX 16x2 Mbit/s
PDH radio
CONCATENATED 2 Mbit/s
LAPS
MUX 16x2 Mbit/s
Fig.51 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram
78
10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
0-4x2 Mbit/s
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, non-802.1p Destination Source Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p Destination Source Tag Control Info Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p 3 bit priority

Tagged frame type interpretation field 802.1p Canonical 12-bit 802.1q VLAN Identifier
8100 h 2-Bytes 3-Bits 1-Bit 12-Bits
Type = 2 byte (8100) Level 2 priority (802.1p) = 3 bit (value from 0 to 7) Level 2 VLAN (802.1q) = 12 bit (value from 1 to 4095) Canonical form = 1 bit (shows if MAC addresses of current frame are with canonical form: - C = 0 canonical form (MAC with LSB at left) (always into Ethernet 802.3 frames) - C = 1 canonocal form (MAC with MSB ay left) (token ring and some FDDI)
Fig.52 - Tag control into field
Queue 3
Queue 2 Input port Output Port
Queue 1
Queue 0
Fig.53 - Output queues
4 Version
4 IHL Total Length TTL
8 TOS Flags
16 Total Length Fragment Offset Header Checksum
Protocol ID
Source IP Address Destination IP Address Options Padding
Data
Fig.54 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
79
MSB 0 1 2 DSCP ToS 3 4
LSB 5 6 7
Not used Not used
Fig.55 - ToS/DSCP
80
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
10
DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES
10.1
IDU COMPACT 1+0/1+1 VERSION
The IDU Compact unit is made by a single motherboard which contains all the circuit that realize the following functionalities: line interface radio interface equipment controller IDU loop.
Inside it, we can distinguish the circuits LIM, RIM, CONTROLLER, as described in the chapter regarding the Modular IDU. The IDU Compact is realized in 1+0 version, containing only one RIM, and 1+1 version, containing two RIMs. The maximum capacity of the IDU Compact is 16x2 Mbit/s.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
81
11
DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES AND FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC
11.1
VERSION IDU COMPACT ETHERNET 1+0/1+1
The compact IDU can be provided with only one optional Ethernet module. In this way, the equipment has both 2 Mbit/s port and Ethernet ports and the bit rate assigned to the Ethernet traffic is the rated capacity of the radio decreased by the enabled tributaries. The module with the Ethernet interface is in alternative to the optional module with the service channels V11, V28 + RS232. The IDU Compact Ethernet is equipped with the following tributary interfaces: 3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT IEEE 802.3 electrical interfaces 16 2 Mbit/s (E1) interfaces.
The total capacity is from 4 to 64 Mbit/s. For the description of the signal processing at 2 Mbit/s, refer to the chapter 8 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES. For the description of the Ethernet signal processing, refer to chapter 9 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH lim ETHERNET (2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET TRAFFIC).
82
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12
DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU PLUS FOR 2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES HIERARCHIC AND NOT HIERARCHIC
12.1
GENERAL
The indoor unit IDU Plus is housed into a 1 Rack Unit (1RU) or 2 Rack Unit (2RU) and can have the following configurations: terminal drop-insert nodal.
Radio side stream has a PDH structure NxE1 but user interface can be NxE1 or SDH STM-1 partially filled. Modulation and capacity are programmable. Other characteristics are: hierarchic transport up to 32E1 not hierarchic transport up to 53E1 tributaries: E1 (2 Mbit/s), STM1, Ethernet managing up to 4 directions with drop-insert and cross-connection capability of 2 Mbit/s streams combined IDU plus can create a nodal system to interface up to 12 radios (ODU) path protection for E1 streams with drop-insert configuration dynamic modulation with automatic switch from 16QAM to 4QAM and viceversa, based on BER and/ or on the RX signal power internal PRBS generator and receiver on a E1 streams local Tx switch managed by Rx alarms on remote equipment modulation 4QAM, 16QAM, 32QAM
12.2
COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU
For 1RU composition see Fig.56: 1 2 3 4 LIM 32E1 or LIM STM1+16E1 equipment controller RIM cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration 1 2 Fig.56 - IDU + 1RU composition 3 4
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
83
12.3
COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU
For 2RU composition see Fig.57: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 equipment controller LIM 32E1 o LIM STM1+16E1 expansion 53E1 cover RIM cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration 1 2 3 4 Fig.57 - IDU + 2RU composition 5 6 7 8
12.4
1RU TERMINAL
With 1 Rack Unit it is possible to configure a 1+0 or 1+1 terminal and to manage up to 32E1 tributaries with LIM32E1 or up to 53x2Mbit/s streams with LIM STM1+16E1 (16 are physical 2 Mbit/s other 37 are built in STM1 stream). Capacity and configuration are listed in Tab.13. Tab.13 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations Capacity 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 5x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 5x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 10x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 10x2 Mbit/s 16x2 Mbit/s 20x2 Mbit/s 16x2 Mbit/s 20x2 Mbit/s 32x2 Mbit/s 42x2 Mbit/s 53x2 Mbit/s Modulation 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM Spectrum use 3,5 MHz Size 1RU
7 MHz
1RU
14 MHz
1RU
28 MHz
1RU
28 MHz
2RU
84
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.5
2RU TERMINAL
With 2 unit IDU Plus it is possible to manage up to 53 tributaries E1 with the following configurations: terminal 1+0 terminal 1+1 terminal 2x (1+0)
12.6
2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE
The 2 Mbit/s tributary interface is 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm. Both interfaces are present into the front panel connectors the user can select the interface to use, preparing in the correct way the relevant cabling.
12.7
MATRIX STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU)
Matrix module provides 16x2 Mbit/s interfaces and one SDH STM1 port. STM1 port is protected by two STM1 interfaces that can be available electrical or optical (different 2 plug-in modules). STM1 is terminated and the contained E1 streams are sent to switch matrix, where E1 streams can be redirected towards radio link, towards 2 Mbit/s interface or remapped into STM-1, or by means of NBUS towards other IDUs equipped with Matrix. Modular IDU Plus is operating in MST mode and has a complete SETS synchronisation circuit with input and output synchronisation signals. Maximum capacity of LIM STM1+16E1 is: 53E1 for terminal 1+0 53E1 for terminal 1+1 79E1 for terminal 2x(1+0).
12.8
DROP-INSERT (2RU)
For 2RU subrack composition see Fig.57: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 equipment controller processor 53E1 matrix 32E1 processor 53E1 RIM cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
85
With drop-insert configuration (only into 2RU, see Fig.58) it is possible to manage up to 4 directions radio (full capacity) with the possibility to drop-insert freely the 2 Mbit/s streams arriving from the 4 directions and from front panel according the capacity of the switch matrix (32E1). For example with 32E1 the maximum drop-insert possibilities is 32 tributaries but total capacity is limited by total capacity of 4 directions. If total capacity of 4 directions is less then 32E1 that is the drop-insert limit. Maximum capacity arriving from the 4 radios is with 4 link at 53E1 for a total of 212 E1. For any configuration the switch matrix is no blocking. A repeater can be done without activating local E1 ports.
ODU1A
ODU2A
ODU1B
ODU2B
RIM1A
RIM2A
RIM1B
RIM2B
Processor A LIM A
53E1 53E1
Processor B LIM B
53E1 53E1
Back Plane
or
Matrix with 32E1 front panel

21E1 32E1 Exp 53E1 STM1 21E1
Matrix with STM1 front panel
16E1 NBUS STM1
NBUS
Two redundant STM1 interfaces

Fig.58 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure
86
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.9
NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)
Composition of nodal is similar to drop-insert (see Fig.57): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 equipment controller processor 53E1 1+0 matrix node STM1+16E1, 1+1 matrix STM-1 +16E1, 2x(1+0) matrix STM1 + 16E1 processor 53E1 RIM cover or RIM cover or RIM cover or RIM
A node can be made up of up to 3 subracks of 2RU so that we can have up to 12 maximum independent radio directions. On the front panel of the STM1+16E1 matrix there are two NBUS ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to other one or two 2RU subracks as in Fig.59 and Fig.60. The connection among the subracks are made by cables of CAT7 quality, SIAE code F03471 length 75 cm, to insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. Each subrack must be defined as NodeA, NodeB or NodeC. The cables among the NBUS must be connected only as in Fig.59 and Fig.60. NBUS can operate in Protected modality or in Not Protected modality. Each NBUS carries 126 E1s. In case of Not Protected modality, all the 126 E1s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the other for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on the NBUS. In case of Protected modality, the unused connections, for example between node A (NBUS1) and node B (NBUS1) are used as protection of the connections between node A (NBUS1) and node B (NBUS1); for example 63 E1s are used between node A and node B and the other 63 E1s are used as protection of the connections between node A and node C, the connections used as protection pass from node B in passthrough modality without need of programming. Warning: for the best operation of the protected modality, it is necessary to choose the shortest path as preferential connection; for example, for the connections between A and B choose the connections between A and B as preferential; for the connection between A and C choose the connections between A and C as preferential. In case of protected modality, the system displays, by means of the SCT/LCT program in the cross-connection window, only the NBUS with 126 E1s (subdivided in two parts for a better graphic display). The unused E1 ports are automatically programmed as pass-through between NBUS1 and NBUS2 but these connections are not displayed in SCT/LCT. In case of unprotected modality, the system displays, by means of the SCT/LCT program in the cross-connection window, the NBUS1 and NBUS2 buses each one with 126 E1 (subdivided in two parts for a better graphic display). The troubles in the connections between the NBUS buses are signalled by alarms. In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.
12.9.1
Expansion from 2 to 3 nodes
Suppose that the nodes A and B already exist and that you must add the node C. Disconnect the cable between NBUS2 node A and NBUS2 node B, the traffic is automatically switched to the other cable, if necessary. By SCT/LCT, re-program the nodes A and B as nodes with 3 items. By SCT/LCT, re-program the node C as nodeC, protected and define the node with 3 items.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
87
Connect the NBUS2 of the node A with NBUS1 of node C, connect the NBUS2 of the node B with NBUS2 of the node C as in Fig.59. Program the interested cross-connections between node A and node C and between node B and node C; the unused connections are automatically assigned to the pass-through between node A and node B. The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from C.
12.9.2
Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes
Suppose that the nodes A, B and C already exist and that the node C must be removed. Delete all the cross-connections between the node C and the node A and between the node C and the node B. Remove the cables of the NBUS which go to node C. Connect the node A NBUS2 to the node B NBUS2 as in Fig.60. The same procedure can be used even if the deleted node is different from C. In NMS5UX/LX the three nodes A, B, C are managed as a single equipment.
2RU Node A
NBUS1 NBUS2
NBUS1
NBUS2
NBUS2
NBUS1
2RU Node B
2RU Node C
Fig.59 - Nodal connections in 3 subracks
2RU
NBUS1 NBUS2
NBUS1
NBUS2
2RU
Fig.60 - Nodal connections in 2 subracks
88
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
53E1 16E1
53E1
53E1
53E1
NODAL
STM1 NBUS
NBUS
STM1 16E1
NBUS
16E1
NODAL
53E1
53E1
53E1
53E1
Fig.61 - Nodal - 12 max radio directions, max 6xstm-1, max 48E1 all disconnecting, no blocking For each subrack of the node, a maximum of 4 radio streams of 53E1 arrive, for a total of 212E1. Each subrack can cross-connect, in no-locking mode, 212E1 (via radio) + 2x126E1 (via NBUS) + 16E1 (via SCSI connector on the front side) + 2x63E1 (via STM-1) for a total of 606E1. A node of 3 subracks with 2RU can cross-connect, in no-locking mode, up to 3x212E1 (via radio) + 3x16E1 (via SCSI connector on the front side) + 6x63E1 (via STM1) for a total of 1062E1 (see Fig.61). The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization circuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node is distributed on the NBUS. The SETS circuit can be seen as a single circuit which provides to the synchronization of the three subracks. The SETS circuit can be disabled if only PDH interfaces are present in the node For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of the connection via cable. The switching criteria in Rx are: Unequipped LOS LOF
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
53E1
53E1
NODAL
53E1
STM1 (1+0) or (1+0 MSP) or 2x(1+0)
53E1
89
MSAIS TIM B2 excessive BER B2 degraded BER.
12.10 DYNAMIC MODULATION

During the period of bad propagation, the system changes modulation to increase the system gain keeping constant the transmitted band, decreasing the transmitted capacity and increasing the availability of the system for the privileged traffic. With the dynamic modulation, about the half of the traffic is saved, without the dynamic modulation all the traffic would be lost at the reaching of the BER threshold of 10-3. The modulation switches from 32QAM to 4QAM or to 16QAM to 4QAM as in Tab.14. Tab.14 - Capacity change Modulation 16/32QAM from 4x2 @ 16QAM 5x2 @ 16QAM 8x2 @ 16QAM 10x2 @ 16QAM 16x2 @ 16QAM 21x2 @ 16QAM 32x2 @ 16QAM 42x2 @ 16QAM 53x2 @ 32QAM Modulation 4QAM to no dynamic modulation no dynamic modulation 4x2 @ 4QAM 5x2 @ 4QAM 8x2 @ 4QAM 10x2 @ 4QAM 16x2 @ 4QAM 21x2 @ 4QAM 21x2 @ 4QAM
The reduction of the traffic capacity is communicated to NMS by means of the Reduced Capacity Alarm.
12.10.1
Capacity reduction
Conditions for the request of modulation change from 32/16QAM to 4QAM by the receiver with lower quality (B): 1 2 3 the PTx power of the transmitter A towards B has reached the maximum value with ATPC active and Max PTx value set to the maximum value the PRx power at the receiver B is lower than the ATPC Low Thresholds and then more power is required to the transmitter BER at the receiver B is lowest than 10-9.
For the restore of the modulation from 4QAM to 16/32QAM, the following conditions are necessary on both sides: 1 2 3 the PTx power at 4QAM is equal to the maximum power possible for the modulation 16/32QAM the ATPC circuit is not requiring the increase of the Tx power of the remote transmitter no error is occurred in the last seconds (default: 10 seconds).
90
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Note: If maximum PTx at 4QAM is 20dBm and the maximum PTx at 16QAM is 15dBm then the difference is 5dB the PTx Boost value can be from 0 to 5dB. If the ATPC values are not correct, the dynamic modulation is not activated. The Performance Monitoring are reported as 16QAM. The AIS on the tributaries is not available. The Upgrade of equipment already installed can be executed by means of the simple download from the supervision network.
12.10.2
Setting with SCT/LCT
A green light signal shows that the dynamic modulation is active, the orange light signal signals that the reduction of modulation is active: in this case the Reduced Capacity Alarm is active. Warning: no configuration change must be made when the Dynamic Modulation is active. In detail, if a loop must be executed, first deactivate the Dynamic Modulation. PTx Boost: increase of PTx power with reduced modulation, default 5Db Receiving Hysteresis: number of dB from the Prx level with BER 10-9, default 2dB. Atpc Hysteresis for recovering: hysteresis of Atpc from the restore of 16QAM, default 0dB. Recovering timeout: seconds with PRx level stable before the restore of the 16QAM modulation, default 10sec. Tx power Overboost: increase of the Tx power of 3dB with 16QAM modulation. Enable only if allowed by the laws of Your country.
12.11 LIM
The LIM performs the following operations: multiplexing process of the input tributaries aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM modulator takes place within the RIM) duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated version the changeover occurs at tributary level.
12.12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Tx side
Refer to Fig.62. The 2 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries. In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service signals interfaced by Equipment Controller module.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
91
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation occurring at the bit rate depending on various versions implemented. The aggregate frame contains: the main signal from the MUX(s) the framed service signal from the service MUX the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment the frame alignment word the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0 at 48 MHz The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.62) of the modulating signal to be sent to the mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM. The digital process includes: serial to parallel conversion differential encoding generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.
Rx side
Refer to Fig.63. From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing: clock recovery frequency and phase carrier locking baseband equalisation and filtering bit polarity decision differential decoding parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken directly from CRC circuit before FEC correction. The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a logic circuit according with Tab.15. The changeover is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic synchronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.
92
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.15 - Switching priority Priority Highest | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Lowest Levels Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Priority 6 Priority 7 Priority 8 Description RIM PSU Alarm Manual forcing (from main controller) Cable Short Alarm Cable Open Alarm IF Unit Alarm Demodulator Failure Base Band Unit Failure Alarm ODU Unit Failure ODU PSU Alarm VCO Failure Alarm High BER >103 (or 104 or 105, selectable by software) Low BER > 106 (or 107 or 108, selectable by software) Early Warning BER > 109 (or 1010 or 1011 or 1012, selectable by software) RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99 dBm) CRC Pulse Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)
12.13 RIM
There are two types of RIM according to modulation capability: 4QAM/16QAM or 4QAM/16QAM/32QAM
Inside the RIM, behind the front panel, the is a fuse for protection to whole IDU. It is a soldering type fuse.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
93
12.13.1
QAM modulator
I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4/16/32QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits: recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process 330 MHz local oscillator a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation
12.13.2
QAM demodulator
12.13.3
Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V. Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An electronic breaker protects the module and the battery against cable failure. Protections are automatically restored. Overcurrent or missing current on IDU-ODU cable are detected by Cable short and Cable open alarm.
12.13.4
Telemetry IDU/ODU
12.14 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

The Equipment Controller module performs the following: interfaces the service signals houses the equipment software for equipment management interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
94
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment.
12.14.1
Service signals
The Equipment Controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options: 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232 synchronous/asynchronous channels 64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional 2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 (not available in no-hierarchical configurations).
12.14.2
Equipment software
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following: Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.66 for details. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following: LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI USB port for 1+0 version RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection (if USB connector is not used) or with other NE EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then controlling the users ID and relevant password. Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration parameters. Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual forcing etc...). Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the alarm signalling on the LIM front panel. Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828. Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
95
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
12.14.3
Supervision ports
The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports. The following are made available: LCT (USB) and RS232 interface with PPP protocol LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols; two LAN interfaces are connected with a all-pass switch EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the supervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.
12.15 IDU LOOPS

12.15.1
Tributary loop


12.15.2
Baseband unit loop
96
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.15.3
IDU loop
12.16 EXPANSION 53E1

This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1 to provide the interfaces necessary to connect up to 53E1.
12.17 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER

This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1. This board gives the interface to service channels CH1 and CH2 plus 2 Mbit/s wayside channel. To be used when there are no matrix and no expansion 53E1.
12.18 PROCESSOR 53E1

The 53E1 processor has the same functionnality of LIM but doesnt have the front panel connector because all 53E1 are sent to Matrix.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
97
98
NRZ 2/34 Mbit/s G.703 CK Code converter
D/A I&Q
to RIM1
NRZ Frame generator X0 48 MHz
nx2 . . . nx34 NRZ Code converter CK
MUX 2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2 Code converter CK 32x2/5x2 10x2/21x2 42x2/53x2 Mbit/s - FSK mod/demod - 388 frame generator/receiver
BI: - main traffic - services - EOC - FEC - FAW Digital MOD - S/P convertion - diff. encoding - modulating signal generation D/A
I&Q
to RIM2
Fig.62 - LIM block diagram - Tx side
2 Mbit/s only (16x2 or wayside higher speed
to/from main controller
services
Controller module
Service channel module
synchr.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

BER meas. P.M. FEC CRC analysis & aligner 2 Mbit/s G.703 Code converter SW logic BE BER extimates High BER Low BER EW DEMUX 2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2 32x2/5x2 10x2/21x2 42x2/53x2 Mbit/s Code converter nx2 Mbit/s from main P switch controls Code converter Services Service channel DEMUX Controller module
I&Q from RIM1
Ck recovery Carrier lock Equaliz. & filt. Decision Diff. decod. S/P
Fig.63 - LIM block diagram - Rx side
I&Q from RIM2
same as above
99
100
from LIM I&Q 330 MHz QAM MOD (IF part) 5.5 MHz to LIM from LIM 17.5 MHz Cable interface Remote power supply Overcurrent protect.

DC battery -48 V DC I/V protect +3.6 V Step down I&Q -5 V to LIM DEM QAM (IF part) Cable equaliz.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
388 kbit/s
Peripheral controller 388 kbit/s generator receiver

388 kbit/s
EOC
Alarm/ User Out
User In
RS232
Main controller
LCT
338 kb/s gen/rec. Peripheral controller 388 kb/s gen/rec.
FSK modem
FSK modem
USB
APPLICATION
SOFTWARE
Applic./present. session layers Transport layer
FSK modem
SNMP
TCP/UDP
Routing layer
IP
Data link layer
PPP
PPP
LLC MAC
LAPD Q921
FSK modem
LAN
IPoverOSI IS-IS ISO 10589
LCC MAC
Physical layer
RS232
EOC
Ethernet LAN
EOC
Ethernet LAN
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
ODU1
ODU2
101
102
LIM
RIM
Trib. IN MUX BI BB loop 330 DEMUX BE Trib. rem. loop MOD
330 MHz to ODU
Trib. OUT
140
IDU loop
Trib. loc. loop
DEM 140 MHz from ODU
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
13
DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT PLUS FOR 2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES AND ETHERNET TRAFFIC
13.1
IDU COMPACT PLUS ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 VERSION
The IDU Compact Plus can be provided with optional Ethernet tributary interface. In this way, the equipment has both 2 Mbit/s ports and the Ethernet ports, and the bit rate assigned to the Ethernet traffic is the rated capacity of the radio decreased by the enabled tributaries. The IDU Compact Plus is equipped with the following interfaces: 3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT IEEE 802.3 electrical interfaces 32 2Mbit/s (32xE1) interfaces.
For the description of the processing of the 2Mbit/s signals, refer to the description of the IDU Plus. For the description of the processing of the Ethernet signals, refer to the description of the IDU Modular Ethernet. The IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet tributary is realized in terminal configuration. The transmission capacity is displayed in Tab.16. Tab.16 - Transmission capacity of the IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet 64 Mbit/s 105 Mbit/s 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT 1+0/1+1 1+0/1+1
V11
RS232
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32 1 2 10/100 BaseT 1 PS 1 2 1 48VDC 3
DPX ACT LINK
TEST R AL
2 2 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
M 3.15A 250VAC
Fig.68 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
103
14
DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR E/W REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT
14.1
GENERAL
Description that follows covers indoor unit for East/West repeater with Ring Protection. Paragraph 14.2 COMPOSITION deals with unit composition because number and type of modules are different respect a standard IDU. Paragraph 14.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS deals with an explanation of unit block diagrams and with a description of functions performed by each module.
14.2
COMPOSITION
Indoor unit for East/West repeater with Drop/Insert functionalities is made up with the following modules: D1205202 D12089 D12094 D12037 Processor unit (2: East, West) Crossconnection matrix Controller RIM (2: East, West)
D12052-02 East
FAIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D12089
FAIL
D12037
RIM 1 RIM 2 RIM 1 RIM 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
West
IDUODU TX RX Q3 LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT A REMTEST CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
FAIL WAY SIDE
D12094
Fig.69 - IDU for E/W repeater
104
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
14.3
IDU CHARACTERISTICS
14.3.1
Management of tributaries
A 2 Mbit/s tributary can be managed by cross connection matrix in different ways: Ring Protection A tributary is inserted (transmitted) in radio aggregate frame towards both direction and can be dropped (received) from one direction or from the other depending on cross connection and E1 switch criteria Pass through IDU works as repeater, tributary coming from one direction is sent to the other Loop E1 accessing the matrix from East side or West side can be looped back towards its origin.
14.3.2
Capacity
IDU max capacity depends on modulation used: 16QAM max capacity is 32x2 Mbit/s with maximum 16 tributaries with protected connections (Drop/Insert). Lower capacity can be set. 4QAM max capacity is 16x2 Mbit/s and in this configuration all tributaries can be set in DropInsert or in Pass through (in this last configuration the three sides of the matrix have the same capacity: 16x2 Mbit/s). Lower capacity can be set.
System can work with one branch capacity different than the other.
14.3.3
E1 switching criteria
In network configuration where thus East/West repeater IDU is employed as a Ring Protection, where a direction protects the other on the opposite direction, the E1 drop can be managed through suitable E1 switching criteria: 1 2 Manual forcing 2 Mbit/s G.704 alarms (AIS, OOF, OOMF, BER6) where: 3 AIS: presence of AIS OOF: out of E1 frame OOMF: out of E1 multiframe BER6: BER = 106
Preferential.
14.4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Description that follows is referring to MATRIX/PROCESSOR/CONTROLLER/RIM module the IDU consists of.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
105
14.4.1
Matrix
Matrix module presents on front panel the 2 Mbit/s connectors and contains the sixteen relevant electrical interface and the cross connection matrix. The matrix allows connections of 2 Mbit/s streams with following capacities and directions: east side 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a 34368 kbit aggregate west side 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a 34368 kbit aggregate towards front panel 16x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm.
Function performed by matrix module are the following: code conversion of 2 Mbit/s streams in input and output (for Drop/Insert operations) tributary transit between East and West tributary transit towards one or both directions, in position not involved in tributary transit tributary drop from East or West or from one of them using appropriate switching criteria.
Tributaries cross connected by matrix are sent and received to/from East and/or West processor module, depending on their direction and connection. Hitless Rx switch between 2 Mbit/s streams, coming from East and West, can work with relative delay up to 7 ms.
14.4.2
Processor
Operations performed by processor module depend on selected capacity and modulation.
Tx side
32x2 Mbit/s (available in 16QAM only) processor module receives from matrix 32 tributaries, the first sixteen one by one and the second sixteen inside a 34368 kbit/s aggregate. The first sixteen tributaries, in MUX block, are grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In this way two aggregates at 34368 kbit/s are sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. After B.I. signal at 77760 kbit/s is sent to modulator. 16x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from Matrix 16 tributaries. The sixteen tributaries are grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In this way the aggregate at 34368 kbit/s is sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. After B.I. signal at 38880 kbit/s is sent to modulator. 8x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 8 tributaries. These are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After B.I. signal at 19440 kbit/s is sent to modulator. 4x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 4 tributaries. These are grouped in one 4x2 Mbit/s group generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After B.I. signal at 9720 kbit/s is sent to modulator. 2x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 2 tributaries. These are grouped in a proprietary frame and sent to the Bit Insertion. After B.I. signal at 4860 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
An additional Service Mux/Demux is provided to aggregate various service signal interfaces by Controller module. Achieved stream is sent to BI/BE to obtain the aggregate frame (various bit rate depending on capacity set) for block MOD/DEMOD. This aggregate frame contains: main signal from MUX and from MATRIX aggregate signal from service MUX
106
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
EOC signal for supervision towards remote equipment Frame Alignment Word Bits dedicated to FEC.
Processor also includes digital process of modulating signal to be sent to the mixer of QAM modulator inside RIM. The digital process includes: serial to parallel conversion differential encoding generation of shaped modulating signal I and Q towards the RIM module.
Rx side
From connected RIM, Processor module receives I and Q analogue signals, converts them in digital form and performs: clock recovery frequency and phase carrier locking baseband equalisation and filtering bit decision differential decoding parallel to serial conversion to recover aggregate signal.
Aggregate signal is sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and after to error corrector block (FEC). Errors are properly counted to achieve: BER estimate measurement Radio performances.
HBER alarm is used to insert AIS in Rx signal. Achieved signal is sent to Bit Ex circuit that, depending on capacity and modulation, performs in opposite way the operations mentioned in Tx side.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
107
108
to/from RIM EAST Q D/A I Q
to/from RIM WEST
D/A 5.5 MHz 17.5 MHz From controller Digital MOD/DEMOD - S/P conversion - Differ. Encode/Decode - Modulation/Demodulation with CRC and FEC - FSK mod - 388 kbit/s
5.5 MHz 17.5 MHz From controller
Digital MOD/DEMOD - FSK mod - 388 kbit/s
- S/P conversion - Differ. Encode/Decode - Modulation/Demodulation with CRC and FEC
77760 kbit/s
77760 kbit/s
From service channel interface Aggregate CK -
Bit In/Bit Ex
From service channel interface
Bit In/Bit Ex Main traffic + services EOC FEC FAW Aggregate CK
Main traffic + services EOC FEC FAW
34368 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s MUX/DEMUX 16x2 WEST
MUX/DEMUX 16x2 MATRIX (17...32) - E1 in Pass through - E1 with protected connection
Fig.70 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix
EAST
(1...16) 16x2 Mbit/s ... Tributary interfaces 1 16
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
14.4.3
RIM
14.4.3.1
QAM modulator
14.4.3.2
QAM demodulator
14.4.3.3
Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V. Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
14.4.3.4
Telemetry IDU/ODU
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
109
14.4.4
CONTROLLER
14.4.4.1
Service signals
14.4.4.2
Equipment software
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following: Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.73 for details. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following: LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI USB asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs or for SCT/LCT connection EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then controlling the users ID and relevant password. Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration parameters. Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral Ps for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual forcing etc...). Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the alarm signalling on the LIM front panel. Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
110
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be used. Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
14.4.4.3
Supervision ports
14.5
IDU LOOPS
14.5.1
Tributary loop


14.5.2
Baseband unit loop
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
111
14.5.3
IDU loop
East side or West side tributary loop

Tributaries, accessing the matrix from East side or West side, not assigned nor in a Transit nor in a cross connection, can be looped back towards their direction of origin.
Cable interface
+3.6 V
I/V protect
Remote power supply
17.5 MHz
330 MHz
5.5 MHz
DC
Step down
-5 V
from LIM
Overcurrent protect.
QAM MOD (IF part)
to LIM
I&Q
from LIM
battery -48 V
I&Q
112
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
to LIM
DEM QAM (IF part)
Cable equaliz.
DC
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
LAN RS232 LCT
User In
Alarm/ User Out
Main controller
EOC
FSK modem
FSK modem
FSK modem 388 kbit/s 388 kb/s gen/rec. ODU1
FSK modem 388 kbit/s 338 kb/s gen/rec. Peripheral controller ODU2
113
APPLICATION Applic./present. session layers Transport layer
SOFTWARE
SNMP
TCP/UDP
Routing layer
Data link layer
PPP
PPP
LLC MAC
LAPD Q921
LCC MAC
Physical layer
RS232
EOC
Ethernet LAN
EOC
Ethernet LAN
114
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
EAST ODU
IDU loop
RIM
MOD/ DEM
PROCESSOR
Baseband loop BI/BE West side
East side
32 . . . . . 1 Remote loop
East side trib. loops
MATRIX
Remote loop .......... Local loop 1 Tributary 16
Local loop
Fig.74 - IDU E/W loops
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
115
15
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT
15.1
GENERAL
The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS. AS ODU is also called Universal ODU because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH). The following ODU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from 33 C to +55 C.
15.2
-
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
see Tab.17
Output power at the antenna side Tuning range AL4 AL7
45.5 MHz 42 MHz (154 MHz go-return) 56 MHz (161/168/196 MHz go-return) 94 MHz (245 MHz go-return) 42 MHz (119 and 126 MHz go-return) 112 MHz (310 MHz go-return) 120 MHz (311,32 MHz go-return) 91 MHz (266 MHz go-return) 94.5 MHz (274 MHz go-return) 84 MHz 84 MHz (315/322 MHz go-return 119 MHz (420/490/728 MHz go-return) 330 MHz 336 MHz 448 MHz 252/280 MHz 560 MHz 125 kHz step
AL8
AL13 AL15 AL18 AL23 AL25/AL28 AL32 AL38
RF frequency agility Duplex spacing AL4 AL7 AL8 AL11 AL13 AL15 AL18 AL23 AL25 AL28
100 MHz 154/161/168/196/245 MHz 311,32 MHz 490/530 MHz 266 MHz 315/322/420/490/728 MHz 1010 MHz 1008/1232 MHz 1008 MHz 1008 MHz
116
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
AL32 AL38
812 MHz 1260 MHz 40 dB 40 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable 40 dB
ATPC dynamic range Transmit power attenuation range Transmitter shutdown Antenna side flange AL4 AL7/8 AL11 AL13 AL15 AL18/23/25 AL28/32/38
N female connector UBR84 (with separated antenna) UBR100 UDR120 or PDR120 with 90 rigid elbow UDR140 or PDR140 with 90 rigid elbow UBR220 or PBR220 with 90 rigid elbow UBR320 or PBR320 with 90 rigid elbow from 20 dBm to threshold corresponding to BER103 3 dB from 50 dBm to threshold 4 dB from 49 dBm to 20 dBm 20 dBm N
AGC dynamic range Accuracy of Rx level indication (PC reading) Maximum input level for BER 103 Type of connector at the cable interface side Signals at the cable interface QAM modulated carrier Telemetry Telemetry carriers
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 140 MHz (from ODU to IDU) 388 kbit/s 17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU) RF loop
Available loops
Tab.17 - Nominal output power (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU (1 dB tolerance) GHz 4
a
Output power 4QAM +29 dBm +27/29 dBm +27/29 dBm +25/28 dBm +25/28 dBm +25/28 dBm +20/23 dBm +20/23 dBm +20/23 dBm +19/22 dBm +17 dBm +17/20 dBm
7 8 11 13 15 18 23 25 28 32
a.
38 a. Only ODU AL
Note In 1+1 hot standby version the output power decreases by the following values: 4 dB 0.5 dB (balanced hybrid) 1.7/7 dB 0.3 dB (unbalanced hybrid)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
117
16
OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION
16.1
GENERAL
The 1+0 ODU (refer to Fig.75 or to Fig.77) consists of a two shell aluminium mechanical structure, one shell housing all the ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate. On the ODU are accessible: the N type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU the BNC connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field strength a ground bolt.
The 1+1 hot standby version (refer to Fig.76) consist of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid for the antenna connection. ODU exists in two different versions, AL and AS. They differs about dimensions and output power. AS ODU is also called Universal because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).
16.2
TRANSMIT SECTION
Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.78. The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 16.4 CABLE INTERFACE) is forwarded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz. The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type. The IF Tx frequency is P controlled. Same happens to Rx IF and RF local oscillators. This latter is common to both Tx and Rx sides. The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is SSB type with side band selection. The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step. Total attenuation is 40 dB including the 20 dB attenuator that follows. The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 16.5 ATPC OPERATION for details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback including the AGC. Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits: a decoupler plus detector diode to measure the output power a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch. a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation an RF bandpass filter for antenna coupling.
An RF coupler plus a detector and a shift oscillator made up the RF loop which is enabled upon receiving a P control. The RF loop permits the Tx power to return back to receive side thus controlling the total local radio terminal performance.
118
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
16.3
RECEIVE SECTION
The RF signal from the Rx bandpass filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sensitivity. The following downconverter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conversion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a P control. A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU. The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to 5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled, distributed in the IF chain. In addition the AGC gives a measure of the receive RF level. Between two amplifiers a bandpass filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.
16.4
CABLE INTERFACE
The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa. It receives/transmits the following signals: 330 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 140 MHz (from ODU to IDU) 17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU) remote power supply.
The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two 388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequency, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the ODU. The ODU management is made by a P.
16.5
ATPC OPERATION
The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB. As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.81) due to the increase of the hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB. If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP causes the output power to decrease.
16.6
1+1 Tx SYSTEM
The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid. 1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.79 and Fig.80.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
119
The transmitter switchover is electromechanical type and consists of two ON/OFF switches within the two ODUs that assure at least 40 dB insulation on the standby transmitter. Transmit alarm priority is shown in Tab.18. Tab.18 - Transmit alarm priority Priority Levels Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Highest Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 3 Priority 4 Lowest Priority 5 Definition RIM PSU Alarm Manual forcing Cable Short Alarm Cable Open Alarm Modulator Failure ODU Unit Failure Alarm VCO Failure Alarm IF Unit Alarm ODU PSU Alarm Tx Power Low Alarm Request from remote terminal (both receivers alarmed) Revertive Tx (branch one preferential)
16.7
POWER SUPPLY
The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry: +3.5 V a voltage comprised between +6.2 V and +8.2 V to power MMIC amplifiers operating at different frequency bands a 12 V through an inverter circuit.
Each voltage is protected against overcurrent with automatic restart. Protection against overvoltage occurs as soon as the output voltage raises more than 15% respect to the nominal voltage. The restart is automatic.
120
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
"N" "BNC" Ground bolt

Fig.75 - 1+0 AL ODU
Fig.76 - 1+1 AL ODU
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
121
Fig.77 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version
122
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
DC +3.5 V
DC Step up +6.2 to 8.2 V PTx att. control 0 to 40 dB
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

INV AGC -12 V x 330 MHz Cable equaliz. IF Tx T MMIC 388 kbit/s MUX DEMUX Tx ctrl LO IF unit Rx ctrl Tx RF LO unit Rx ctrl RF loop antenna side Alarm manag & control Alm comm loops REC 17.5 MHz 388 kbit/s DEM 17.5 MHz ctrl approx. 765 MHz LNA variable bw (capacity depending) AGC 140 MHz 140 MHz
-48 V
N type
Cable interface
MOD 5.5 5.5 MHz MHz
BNC
Fig.78 - ODU block diagram (both versions)
PRx meas.
17.5 MHz
PRx meas
123
Tx side SW control
Rx side Antenna side Tx side SW control
Rx side
Fig.79 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna
Tx side SW control First antenna
Rx side
Tx side SW control Second antenna Rx side
Fig.80 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas
124
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Remote PRx dBm
Local Thresh High Thresh Low P Transmission Rx of PTx control Tx PTx actuation
Remote Rx PRx recording level P PTx control Tx
Hop attenuation (dB) Local PTx dBm
PTx max.
40 dB ATPC range PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB)
Fig.81 - ATPC operation
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
125
17
24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089
17.1
GENERAL
The 24/48V DC/DC converter D52089 is a unit which converts the voltage of 24 Vdc in 48 Vdc. This unit is housed in a subrack 1 RU unit G52004 with two D52089 units (1+1 version). For 1+0 version the subrack is G52003 with one D52089 unit and the remaining half front panel has a cover. These subracks have a free air gap for cooling purpose. The DC/DC converter unit D52089 is shown in Fig.82.
Fuse 6.3 A 24 Vdc input male 3W3 connector
M6,3A 250V
ON
24Vdc IN
Green LED
+
48Vdc OUT 2A
ALARM
48 Vdc output female 3W3 connector
CM2 connector
Fig.82 - DC/DC converter front coverplate
17.2
-
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
-10 50 C -40 80 C 90% max in the range -5 30 C
Operational range Storage range Operational humidity
17.3
126 Vinput
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
24 Vdc (20.4 28.8 Vdc floating) 52 Vdc 4.5 A 90 W 75 W 200 mVpp ETS 300 132-2 ETS 300 132-2
Voutput Max current in input Max 24 Vdc consumption Max 48 Vdc load Secondary voltage ripple Surge current (Inrush current) Conducted immunity
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Conducted emission Short duration voltage transient Abnormal service voltage Voltage changes due to the regulation of power supply Electromagnetic compatibility Safety Protections against
ETS 300 132-2 ETS 300 132-2 (ETR 283) ETS 300 132-2 ETS 300 132-2 EN 300 086 EN 60950-1 - input polarity inversion (fuse) - surge input current (fuse) - continuous short circuit at output with automatic recovery ON = green led active on input primary voltage present with relay contact on 9 pin male SUBD connector Alarm off: 89 pin open, 79 pin closed Alarm on when Vout decreases 15%: 89 pin closed, 79 pin open 6.3 A medium time 250 Volt
Visual indication Alarm (CM2 connector)
Fuse
Fig.83 shows, as example, connection from IDU 1+0 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cable F03489. Fig.84 shows, as example, connections from IDU 1+1 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cables F03489 and F03278. Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN. Warning: power supply from 48 Vdc must be connected directly to ALC IDU.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
127
6,3A M 250V IN 24Vdc 2A OUT 48Vdc
ON
F03489
Trib. 1234
Q3
LCT
USER IN/OUT
48V PS
TEST
R Trib. 5678 +
AL
Fig.83 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN
128
G52003
ALARM
Fuse 6.3 A
24 Vdc IN
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
6,3A M 250V 24Vdc IN ON 24Vdc IN 48Vdc 2A OUT 6,3A M 250V
ON
ALARM
F03278
Trib. 1234 Trib. 9101112
Q3
LCT USER IN/OUT
48V1 PS1 1 Trib. 5678 Trib. 13141516 + PS2 +
48V2
TX RX
TEST
AL
Fig.84 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fuse 6.3 A 24 Vdc IN

48Vdc OUT 2A
Fuse 6.3 A
24 Vdc IN
ALARM
F03489
129
130
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 3. INSTALLATION
18
INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
18.1
GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION
ALS equipment is a split mount (indoor-outdoor) PDH/SDH radio link system operating in the frequency ranges 4, 6, 7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz, for low, medium and high transport capacity (from 4 up to 622 Mbit/s), designed to establish LAN-LAN connections and PDH/SDH access. For the details related to the actual used frequency band refer to the label on the equipment. The system is provided with an integral antenna; however, in case its antenna is not used, it should be connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequency band. The equipment is composed by the following separate units: radio unit (outdoor) with or without integral antenna Baseband (indoor)
This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands. Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority. The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regulation for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field. The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
131
18.2
GENERAL
The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19 subrack (IDU) and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate cardboard box. After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the following paragraphs.
18.3
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
18.3.1
IDU installation
On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6 screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19 mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19 rack by means of 4 M6 screws.
18.3.2
1RU IDU installation
To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above a 1RU IDU must be 44 mm (1RU) minimum.
18.3.3
2RU IDU installation
To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above a 2RU IDU must be 44 mm (1RU) minimum. Nodal and Drop/Insert compositions need the use of D12148-03 controller. In case of different compositions it is necessary to have 88 mm (2RU) free space below and above the 2RU IDU.
18.4
ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the electromagnetic compatibility standards. The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on the equipment front. Position and pinout of the equipment connectors are available in this section. Tab.19 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.
132
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.19 - Characteristics of the cables Interconnecting points Battery Type of connector terminating Type of cable/conductor the cable Polarized SUBD 3W3 female con- Section of each wire 2.5 nector sq.mm a 75 ohm coaxial cable with double shield diameter 4.5 mm dielectric in expanded polyethylene type 2YCC 0.4/2.5 or equivalent Alternatively to the above option, 75 ohm coaxial cable with double shield, diameter 3.1 mm dielectric in Teflon type RG179 B/U DS or equivalent 120 Ohm balanced four symmetric pairs with shield 75 Ohm unbalanced four coaxial cable pairs with the shield connect to ground pin (see 19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS document for pin details) 8 conductor cable different for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm signals 9 conductor cable with double brass sheath type interconductor DB28.25 or equivalent 9 conductor cable with double brass sheath type interconductor DB 28.10 or equivalent Section area 6 sq. mm.
Tributary signals
1.0/2.3 male connector
Tributary signals
25 pin SUBD male connector
Tributary signals
SCSI 50 pin male connector (IDU Plus)
User input/alarm output
Female type D connector with 9 pins and shielded holder
LCT/RS232
Female type D connector with 9 pins and shielded holder Faston male type
GND a.
For power cable length longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm is required.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
133
18.5
CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS
During the final installation, the IDU must be protected by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one's country. The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the connector SUB-D 3W3 from the IDU.
18.6
GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.85 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Indoor
ODU unit
1 7 5
IDU unit
(+) (-)
Station ground
Local ground
ground rack
Legend
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IDU grounding point, faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq. mm. The faston is available on the IDU both sides. ODU grounding bolt. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16 sq. mm IDUODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4 terminated with Ntype male connectors at both sides. Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable. Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA or BNT male and N female connectors. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area 2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable must be 16 sq. mm Fig.85 - Grounding connection
134
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
19
MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS
19.1
CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR VERSION
The user connections are performed through connectors on LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules. The connectors are the following: LIM module 16x2 Mbit/s (see Fig.86) Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm type. For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.20.
LIM module 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT (see Fig.87) Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm type. For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.20. 10/100BaseT Ethernet: RJ45 connector.
Controller module LCT: RS232 type: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail refer to Tab.22. USB type connector B receptable. For connector detail refer to USB standard. USER IN/OUT: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector details refer to Tab.28. RS232: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail see Tab.23. Q3: connector or micro SUBD 15 pins and RJ45. For SUBD and RJ45 connector details refer to Tab.21. CH1/CH2: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.25 and Tab.26. 2 Mbit/s: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.27.
RIM module connector TNC50 Ohm for interconnection to ODU connector SUBD, 3 pins for interconnection to battery.
LIM module 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT (see Fig.88) Trib IN/OUT: connectors SCSI female 50 pins 75 Ohm type and 120 Ohm. For details refer to Tab.36 10/100BaseT Ethernet: RJ45 connector.
LIM
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s FAIL
RIM
RIM 1 RIM 2
Trib: A-B-C-D
Trib: E-F-G-H
Trib: I-J-K-L IDU ODU A R Q3 REM TEST
Trib: M-N-O-P TX RX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
RIM1 RIM2
LCT
USER IN/OUT
RS232
RIM CONTROLLER
Fig.86 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
135
FAIL
LCT
USER IN/OUT
RS232
Fig.87 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
1 IDU ODU A R Q3
2 TX RX 1 2
LINK ACT WAY SIDE
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
REM TEST
Fig.88 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT
19.2
MODULAR VERSION CONNECTORS

Tab.20 - Tributary connector pinout (Sub-D 25 pin male) Pin 1 2 14 15 16 3 4 5 17 18 19 6 7 8 20 21 22 9 10 11 23 24 120 Ohm impedance Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire) 75 Ohm impedance Ground Tributary 1/5/9/13 input Ground Ground Tributary 1/5/9/13 output Ground Ground Tributary 2/6/10/14 input Ground Ground Tributary 2/6/10/14 output Ground Ground Tributary 3/7/11/15 input Ground Ground Tributary 3/7/11/15 output Ground Ground Tributary 4/8/12/16 input Ground Ground
a
136
DPLX ACT LINK
DPLX ACT LINK
DPLX ACT LINK
3 RIM 1 RIM 2 + WAY SIDE RIM 1 RIM 2 + -
10/100 BTX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2 Mbit/s
A Q3
IDU ODU
TX RX
TEST REM
10-100 BaseT
DPX FAIL
48V RIM 1 RIM 2
48V
RIM 1 RIM 2
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25 12 13
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground) Ground
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output Ground Ground
a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pinout is referred to the flying connectors to be connected to the equipment connectors. Tab.21 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Tx+ Tx Rx+ Rx
Tab.22 - LCT connector pinout for connection to supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description RxD TxD GND
Tab.23 - RSR232 connector pinout for supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6/7/8/9 Description Not connected Rx D (IN) Tx D (OUT) Not connected GND --
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
137
Tab.24 - CH1 connector pinout for 9600 bit/s V.24 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description CKTx TD DTR DSR GND RD9600 CKRx DCD
Tab.25 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) TD (2 ch 4800) GND RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) RD (2 ch 4800)
Tab.26 - CH2 connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description DV11Tx D+V11Tx CV11Tx C+V11Tx DV11Rx D+V11Rx CV11Rx C+V11Rx
138
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.27 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pinout (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description TxC TxF GND RxC RxF GND
Tab.28 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside (Sub-D 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description C relay contact branch 1 NA/NC relay contact branch 1 C relay contact branch 2 NA/NC relay contact branch 2 User input 01 User input 02 User input 03 User input 04 GND
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
139
20
IDU COMPACT USER CONNECTIONS
20.1
CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 COMPACT VERSION
User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.89). The connectors are the following: Trib IN/OUT: 75 or 120 25pin SUBD male connector. For SUBD connector details Fig.89. LCT: USB connector B type "Receptacle". For connector detail see USB standard. USER IN/OUT: SUBD male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.34. Q3: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.30. 50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU1. 48V: 3 pin SUBD 3W3 connector for interconnection to battery. V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.31. V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.32. RS232 PPP: optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.33.
Trib. 1234
Trib. 9101112
Q3 TX RX TEST R AL 1 2
LCT
USER IN/OUT 1 Trib. 5678 Trib. 13141516
48V1 PS1
48V2 2 PS2 1 2
Fig.89 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)
SMA kind: max torque 0.5 Nm
140
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.29 - Tributary connector pinout (male 25 pin SUBD) Pin 1 2 14 15 16 3 4 5 17 18 19 6 7 8 20 21 22 9 10 11 23 24 25 12 13 120 Ohm impedance Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground) Ground 2 14 15 16 3 4 5 17 18 19 6 7 8 20 21 22 9 10 11 23 24 25 12 13 Pin 75 Ohm impedancea Ground Tributary 1/5/9/13 input Ground Ground Tributary 1/5/9/13 output Ground Ground Tributary 2/6/10/14 input Ground Ground Tributary 2/6/10/14 output Ground Ground Tributary 3/7/11/15 input Ground Ground Tributary 3/7/11/15 output Ground Ground Tributary 4/8/12/16 input Ground Ground Tributary 4/8/12/16 output Ground Ground
a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pinout is referred to the flying connectors to be connected to the equipment connectors.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
141
Tab.30 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Tx+ TxRx+ --Rx---
Tab.31 - S.C. connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description D-V11-Tx D+V11-Tx C-V11-Tx C+V11-Tx D-V11-Rx D+V11-Rx C-V11-Rx C+V11-Rx
Tab.32 - S.C. connector pinout V.28 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description RTS TD DTR DSR GND RD CTS DCD
142
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.33 - Connector pinout RS232 PPP interface (Sub-D 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description DCD RD TD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS NC
Tab.34 - User in/out connector pinout (Sub-D 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description relay contact NA/NC relay contact User input 01 User input 02 GND NC User input 03 User input 04 NC
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
143
21
MODULAR IDU PLUS USER CONNECTIONS
21.1
CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU PLUS VERSION
User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules. IDU with LIM 32x2 Mbit/s or 53x2 Mbit/s (see Fig.90 and Fig.91) Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.35, Tab.36 LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard. USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.38 Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.37 50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU 48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery. V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.42 V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.41 RS232 optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.38 2 Mbit/s wayside: optional 2 Mbit/s service channel. Connector details in Tab.43
Besides the previous ones, only for the Nodal version (see Fig.92): STM-1 in/out: electric interface with female connector 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm; plug-in module with electric interface, connector 1.0/2.3; plug-in module with optical interface, LC connector NBUS: connect to other Nodal IDU Plus only with cable of Siae code F03471 2 Mbit/s in/out: input, 2 MHz signal output with connector 1.0/2.3 at 75 Ohm.
IDU with LIM 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT (see Fig.93) As previous connectors but: 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector: RJ45 connector.
FAIL
+
WAY SIDE
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16 Q3/2 Q3/1
Trib: 17-24 A IDU ODU R REM TEST CH1
Trib: 25-32
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.90 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 32x2 Mbit/s)

Q3/2 Q3/1 A LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT REM TEST IDU ODU R CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
+
FAIL
FAIL Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53
Fig.91 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)
144
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24
Trib: 25-32
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Q3/2
Q3/1 A
WAY SIDE
+
FAIL
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
NBUS
ON
ON FAIL
Trib: 1-8
2MHz
STM1
Trib: 9-16
FAIL
Fig.92 - Nodal IDU Plus 2 units - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1, 4+0 version
10-100 BaseT
DPX FAIL
+
LINK ACT WAY SIDE
48V
+ +
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24 Q3/2 Q3/1 A
1 IDUODU R REM TEST
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.93 - Modular IDU Plus - 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT Tab.35 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm Pin 48 23 50 25 47 22 45 20 42 17 43 18 40 15 39 14 36 11 37 12 34 9 33 8 29 4 75 Ohm Ground A Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input Ground A Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output Ground B Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input Ground B Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output Ground B Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
145
31 6 28 3 26 1
Ground B Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.
25
......................... .........................
50
26
Fig.94 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female
146
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.36 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female) Pin 49 23 44 24 25 44 21 22 44 46 20 44 16 17 44 19 18 44 41 15 44 13 14 44 10 11 32 38 12 32 35 9 32 7 8 32 120 Ohm Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input Ground A Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output Ground A Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input Ground B Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output Ground B
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
147
5 4 32 30 6 32 27 3 32 2 1 32
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input Ground B Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output Ground B
Tab.37 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Tx+ TxRx+ --Rx---
Tab.38 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (SUBD 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description DCD (IN) RD (IN) TD (OUT) DTR (OUT) GND Not connected RTS (OUT) CTS (IN) Not connected
148
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.39 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description CKTx (OUT) TD (IN) DTR (IN) DSR (OUT) GND RD9600 (OUT) CKRx (OUT) DCD (OUT)
Tab.40 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description -TxD (IN) DTR (IN) DSR GND RxD (OUT) -DCD (OUT)
Tab.41 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description -TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (IN) TD (2 ch 4800) (IN) -GND RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (OUT) -RD (2 ch 4800) (OUT)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
149
Tab.42 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description D-V11-Tx D+V11-Tx C-V11-Tx C+V11-Tx D-V11-Rx D+V11-Rx C-V11-Rx C+V11-Rx
Tab.43 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Tx-C (IN) common TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm GND TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm Rx-C (OUT) common Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm GND Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm
Tab.44 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description C relay contact- branch 1 NA/NC relay contact - branch 1 C relay contact - branch 2 NA/NC relay contact - branch 2 User input 01 User input 02 User input 03 User input 04 Ground
150
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
22
IDU COMPACT PLUS USER CONNECTIONS
22.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU COMPACT PLUS VERSION
User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.95 and Fig.96). The connectors are the following: Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.45, Tab.46 LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard. USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.51 Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.47 50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU 48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery. V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.50 V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.49
V11
RS232 M 3.15A 250VAC 48VDC PS
TEST AL
Q3/2
Q3/1
LCT
USER IN/OUT
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
Fig.95 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)
V11
RS232
Trib. 17-24
Trib. 25-32 1 2 10/100 BaseT 1 PS 1 2 3
DPX ACT LINK
TEST R AL
2 2 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
- 48VDC
M 3.15A 250VAC
Fig.96 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
151
Tab.45 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female) Pin 48 23 50 25 47 22 45 20 42 17 43 18 40 15 39 14 36 11 37 12 34 9 33 8 29 4 31 6 28 3 26 1 75 Ohm Ground A Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input Ground A Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output Ground B Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input Ground B Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output Ground B Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input Ground B Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.
25
......................... .........................
50
26
Fig.97 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female
152
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.46 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female) Pin 49 23 44 24 25 44 21 22 44 46 20 44 16 17 44 19 18 44 41 15 44 13 14 44 10 11 32 38 12 32 35 9 32 7 8 32 120 Ohm Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input Ground A Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input Ground A Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input Ground A Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input Ground A Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output Ground A Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input Ground B Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input Ground B Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output Ground B
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
153
5 4 32 30 6 32 27 3 32 2 1 32
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input Ground B Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input Ground B Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output Ground B
Tab.47 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Tx+ TxRx+ --Rx---
Tab.48 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description RTS (OUT) Tx (OUT) DTR (OUT) DSR (IN) GND Rx (IN) CTS (IN) DCD (IN)
154
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.49 - V11 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description RTS (IN) TxD (IN) DTR (IN) DSR (OUT) GND RxD (OUT) CTS (OUT) DCD (OUT)
Tab.50 - V11 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 asynchronous interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description -TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (IN) TD (2 ch 4800) (IN) -GND RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800) (OUT) -RD (2 ch 4800) (OUT)
Tab.51 - V11 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description for V11 D-V11-Tx (IN) D+V11-Tx (IN) C-V11-Tx (OUT) C+V11-Tx (OUT) D-V11-Rx (OUT) D+V11-Rx (OUT) C-V11-Rx (OUT) C+V11-Rx (OUT) D-Rx (OUT) D+Rx (OUT) Description for contradirectional D-Tx (IN) D+Tx (IN)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
155
Tab.52 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description C relay contact NA/NC relay contact User input 01 User input 02 GND NC User input 03 User input 04 NC
156
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
23
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
23.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions: 1+0 version antisliding strip (see Fig.98) supporting plate plus 60114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.99) adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.100) Band-it fixing system (see Fig.103) antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.101) support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.99) connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional) (see Fig.101) kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+0 version (6 GHz only) Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.109). The flange is UDR70.
1+1 version antisliding strip (see Fig.98) supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.99) adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.100) hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.102) flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.101) kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
1+0/1+1 4 GHz version is fully described in chapter 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)
Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, dont fold or twist them more than values specified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier. In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.55 shows the maximum bending radius.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
157
23.2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

N.2 13mm torque wrench N.1 15 mm torque wrench N.1 17 mm torque wrench N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and its opposite, step by step.
23.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps: Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
2
Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
2
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version) ODU grounding
1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.98 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the supporting plate (see next step) Fig.99 Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.99). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm. Warning: As shown in Fig.100 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant Ubolt for 219 mm pole fixing. Fig.101 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Fig.101 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.101) or vertically as function of convenience. Fig.102 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available bolts and nuts. Fig.102 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.
158
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by Band-it
In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.103) on the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are: thickness width 0.76 mm 19 mm.
It is also possible to use the anti-sliding system (optional).
1+1 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.98 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the supporting plate (see next step) Fig.99 Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.99). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm. Fig.104 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm. Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides. Fig.104 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque:
Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange as shown in Fig.107. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
Installation of the ODU

1 Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring of Fig.106. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side flange (see Fig.106) to antenna side flange (see Fig.101 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see Fig.104 1+1 version). Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.105 depending on the polarisation. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.101 1+0 version or Fig.104 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.106) When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.101 1+0 version or Fig.104 1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm. Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.107. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.
2 3
5 6
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
159
23.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.108. Tab.55 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency Bending radius without rebending mm (inch) E-plane a 200 (7,9) 200 (7,9) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 110 (4,3) 80 (3,1) Bending radius without rebending mm (inch) H-plane b 500 (19,8) 500 (19,8) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 230 (9,1) 140 (5,5) Bending radius with rebending mm (inch) E-plane a. 300 (11,9) 250 (9,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 130 (5,1) 90 (3,6) Bending radius with rebending mm (inch) H-plane b. 600 (23,7) 600 (23,7) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 250 (9,9) 150 (5,9)
Frequency
6 GHz or 7 GHz low 7 GHz high 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 38 GHz a. Bending E-plane
Rmin/E Bending E-plane (short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane
Rmin/H Bending H-plane (long side of the section)
160
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Antisliding strip
Plastic blocks
Fig.98 - Antisliding strip
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
161
Use 17 mm wrench (32Nm torque)
Supporting plate Use 15 mm wrench (32Nm torque)
Fig.99 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing
162
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.100 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
163
In option
Antenna side flange
Support with ODU fast lockinh mechanism
Dente di riferimento Reference tooth
1 1
Position of antenna side flange
13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque Fig.101 - Mounting position
164
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
Fig.102 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
165
Fig.103 - Band-it pole mounting kit
166
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Use 13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
Optional vawe guide 1
RT1
RT2
Fig.104 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
167
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.105 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
168
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth O-ring ODU side flange
AL version
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
AS version
Fig.106 - ODU body reference tooth
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
169
AL version
Suncover (optional)
AS version
Fig.107 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
170
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 2 3 4 5
AL version
AS version
Fig.108 - ODU grounding
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
171
Spring
Washer Screw M5x25 UDR70 antenna flange
Screw M4x8
Fig.109 - Kit V32409
172
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
UDR70 flange
Screw M4x18 Spring Washer O-Ring
Hybrid 6 GHz (balanced or unbalanced)
Fig.110 - Kit V32415
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
173
24
INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
24.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions: 1+0 version wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.111) antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.112) support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.112) connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional) (see Fig.112) kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.111) hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.114) connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional) (see Fig.112) kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
1+0/1+1 4 GHz version is fully described in chapter 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)
In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.58 shows the maximum bending radius.
24.2


N.2 13mm torque wrench N.1 15 mm torque wrench N.1 17 mm torque wrench N.1 3 mm allen wrench.
174
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
24.3
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps: version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version) ODU grounding.
1+0 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.111 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface. Fig.111 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws. Fig.112 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.56 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Fig.112 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.112) or vertically as function of convenience. Fig.113 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available bolts and nuts. Fig.113 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+1 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.111 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface. Fig.111 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws. Fig.114 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm. Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides. Fig.114 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.57 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange as shown in Fig.117 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
175
Installation of the ODU

1 Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring of Fig.116. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side flange (see Fig.116) to antenna side flange (see Fig.112 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see Fig.114 1+1 version).
2 3
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.115 depending on the polarisation. 4 With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.112 1+0 version or Fig.114 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.116) When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.112 1+0 version or Fig.114 1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
5 6
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.117. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.
176
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
24.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.118. Tab.58 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency Bending radius without rebending mm (inch) E-plane a 200 (7,9) 200 (7,9) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 110 (4,3) 80 (3,1) Bending radius without rebending mm (inch) H-plane b 500 (19,8) 500 (19,8) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 230 (9,1) 140 (5,5) Bending radius with rebending mm (inch) E-plane a. 300 (11,9) 250 (9,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 130 (5,1) 90 (3,6) Bending radius with rebending mm (inch) H-plane b. 600 (23,7) 600 (23,7) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 250 (9,9) 150 (5,9)
Frequency

b. Bending H-plane
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
177
Extension plate
Supporting plate
M8 bolt and nut
Another possible fixation
Fig.111 - Wall supporting plate
178
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
In option
Antenna side flange
Support with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth Reference tooth
1 1 13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
Position of antenna side flange
Fig.112 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
179
Fig.113 - Mounting possible positions
180
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Use 13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
Optional wave guide
RT1
RT2
Fig.114 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
181
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.115 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
182
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth
O-ring ODU side flange
AL version
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
AS version
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
183
Suncover (optional)
AL version
AS version
Fig.117 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
184
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 2 3 4 5
AL version
AS version
1 2 3 4 5
Bolt Spring washer Flat washer Earth cable collar Flat washer Fig.118 - ODU grounding
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
185
Spring
Washer Screw M5x25
UDR70 antenna flange
Screw M4x8
Fig.119 - Kit V32409
186
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
UDR70 flange
Screw M4x18 Spring Washer O-Ring
Hybrid 6 GHz (balanced or unbalanced)
Fig.120 - Kit V32415
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
187
25
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA
25.1
FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.
25.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version
60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of: centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.121) antislide strip (see Fig.122) pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.123) ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version
pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of: centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.121) antislide strip (see Fig.122) pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.123)
hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.132) polarization twist disk (see Fig.134) 2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.
188
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25.3


N.2 13 mm torque wrench N.1 15 mm torque wrench N.1 17 mm torque wrench N.1 3 mm allen wrench.
25.4
Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:
1+0 version
1 2 3 4 5 installation onto the pole of the support system installation of the antenna installation of ODU antenna aiming ODU grounding
1+1 version
1 2 3 4 5 6 installation onto the pole of the support system installation of the antenna installation of hybrid circuit installation of the two ODUs antenna aiming ODU grounding.
25.4.1
Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna
Fig.121 Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded holes around antenna flange. Mount centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated bolts. Caution: centring ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out. Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. Fig.122 Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.122 following antenna aiming direction. Tighten the strip with screwdriver. Fig.123 Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direction as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the centre of supporting plate. Supporting system should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.124. Position the antenna in such a way that
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
189
bolt in position A or D of Fig.121 cross through hole E of Fig.125. Secure the support system to the pole by means of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts. Fig.126 Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support holes. Secure the antenna to the support by thightening the relevant passing through bolts.
25.4.2
Installation of ODU
1+0 version
1 2 3 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring (4) of Fig.129 by protecting finger hands with gloves. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle can assume position of Fig.127 depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange (see Fig.128). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.128) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.129). When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Fig.130 and Fig.131 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.128.
1+1 version
Fig.132 Apply silicon grease, type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to Orings (1). Insert Orings (1) and (6) into twist polarization disk (2). Vertical polarization Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark. Horizontal polarization Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark. In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as shown in Fig.133. Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker (4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively screws (7) with the same number of spring washers (8) with the following torque: Tab.59 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Fig.134 Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels of Fig.134. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).
190
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25.4.3
ODU installation
The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same. 1 2 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring (4) of the Fig.129 by protecting finger hands with gloves. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the ODU can assune position of Fig.127 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization). Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange (see Fig.128). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.128) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.129). When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Fig.130 and Fig.131 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively for 1+0 version. Fig.135 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.128.
25.5
ANTENNA AIMING
Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position: Horizontal vertical 15 operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.136, only after having loosen the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.137. 15 operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.136 only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and (4) and (5) of Fig.136. For adjustment from 0 to +30 extract nut (1) Fig.137 and position it in hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.137 and position it in hole (6). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and (4) of Fig.136. For adjustment from 0 to 30 extract nut (1) of Fig.137 and position it in hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.137 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and (4) of Fig.136. For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0 starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and (4) and (5) of Fig.136 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.137 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.
25.6
COMPATIBILITY
The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
191
25.7
GROUNDING
See Fig.138. On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.
192
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
B
Vertical polarization
A
horizontal polarization
3 mm allen key 2,5 Nm torque
2 3
A C 1
1 2 3
Antenna Calibrated Allen screw Centring ring Fig.121 - Centring ring position
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
193
1 2
Steel belt Plastic blocks Fig.122 - Antislide strip
194
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2 3
Antenna aiming direction
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
1 3 3
3
1 2 3 4 Pole fixing brackets Tooth Bolt Pole support system Fig.123 - Support mount on pole
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
195
Antenna aiming direction
Tooth Fig.124 - Supporting system position
Fig.125 - Hole E
196
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
D 15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
A, B, C, D Bolt slots Fig.126 - Antenna installation on pole support
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.127 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
197
1 H
H H 1 1 H H
H H
H: Reference tooth Fig.128 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence
198
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth
O-ring ODU side flange
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
199
5 30
Fig.130 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization
5 30
5 30
Fig.131 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization
200
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7 8 1 2 4 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Oring Polarization twist disk Hybrid mechanical body Position marker of twist disk Reference label for twist disk Oring Allen screws Spring washer Fig.132 - Hybrid and polarization disk
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
201
Horizontal polarization
Fig.133 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)
202
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 RT1 2 1 RT2
1 2 Bolts Spring washer Fig.134 - Hybrid mount on pole support
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
203
AL version
AS version
Fig.135 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version
204
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
3 5
1 2 3 4 5 Marker Vertical adjustment Horizontal adjustment Bolt Fixing nut
4 2 1
Fig.136 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
205
11
7 3
10 9 5 2 6
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque 15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts 5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts 8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to 30 9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aimimg up to +30 Fig.137 - Antenna aiming block
206
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 2 3 4 5
AL version
AS version
1 2 3 4 5
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
207
26
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309)
26.1
FOREWORD
The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits: V32307 V32308 V32309 for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz
Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.139): V32307 V32308 V32309 centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz no centring ring (and relevant screws).
26.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: centring ring and relevant screws pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: centring ring and relevant screws pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets 1+0 ODU support hybrid and relevant screws polarization twist disk and relevant screws 2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.
208
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
26.3


N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench N.1 3 mm Allen wrench N.1 6 mm Allen wrench N.1 13 mm spanner N.2 17 mm spanner.
26.4
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 antenna polarization installation of the centring ring on the antenna installation of 1+0 ODU support installation onto the pole of the assembled structure installation of ODU antenna aiming ODU grounding
1+1 version
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 antenna polarization installation of the centring ring on the antenna installation of 1+0 ODU support installation onto the pole of the assembled structure installation of hybrid installation of ODUs antenna aiming ODU grounding.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
209
26.5
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
26.5.1
Setting antenna polarization
Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).
26.5.2
Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use 3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).
26.5.3
Installation of 1+0 ODU support
Fig.139 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed, must be mounted with the two bushes around.
26.5.4
Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.139 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10 screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side, the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
26.5.5
Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)
Fig.140 Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.142) and reference tooth on the ODU body. Fig.143 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations. Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm spanner, torque = 6Nm).
210
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
26.5.6
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same. Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 17 mm spanner, only after having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot. Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 13 mm spanner, only after having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support. Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
26.5.7
ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with: M8 screw without washers M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.145.
26.6
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 26.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES.
26.6.1
Installation of Hybrid
Fig.146 The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk. Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark. Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark. In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as shown in Fig.147. Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque: Tab.60 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Fig.148 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten progressively and alternatively the bolts.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
211
26.6.2
Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs. Fig.140 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization. Fig.149 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position. Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 6 Nm). WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
Four 13mm screws Centring ring (not present in V32309)
Three 3mm Allen screws (not present in V32309)
Antenna
1+0 support Two bushes
Fig.139 - 1+0 pole mounting
212
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth O-ring ODU wave guide
"N" "BNC"
Ground bolt
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.141 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
213
3 1 2
1 5 4
4 1 5
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 mm Allen screw Bush (diagonally placed) 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm) Reference point for horizontal polarization Reference point for vertical polarization Fig.142 - 1+0 support
214
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right: horizontal polarization
1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left: vertical polarization
Fig.143 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
215
Horizontal aiming: two 17mm block screws
Vertical aiming: 13mm block screws Pole support
17mm nut for horizontal adjustment of antenna
Internal 5mm Allen screw for vertical adjustment of antenna
Fig.144 - Antenna aiming
216
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 2 3 4 5
AL version
AS version
1 2 3 4 5
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
217
7 8 1 2 4 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Oring Polarization twist disk Hybrid mechanical body Position marker of twist disk Reference label for twist disk Oring Allen screws Spring washer Fig.146 - Hybrid and twist disk
218
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.147 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
219
Fig.148 - Hybrid installation
220
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
AL version
AS version
Fig.149 - 1+1 ODUs installation
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
221
222
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
27
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA
27.1
FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 version.
27.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: centring ring and relevant screws pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: centring ring and relevant screws pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets 1+0 ODU support hybrid and relevant screws polarization twist disk and relevant screws 2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.
27.3


N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench N.1 3 mm Allen wrench N.1 6 mm Allen wrench
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
223
N.1 13 mm spanner N.2 17 mm spanner.
27.4
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 antenna polarization installation of the centring ring on the antenna installation of 1+0 ODU support installation onto the pole of the assembled structure installation of ODU antenna aiming ODU grounding
1+1 version
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 antenna polarization installation of the centring ring on the antenna installation of 1+0 ODU support installation onto the pole of the assembled structure installation of hybrid installation of ODUs antenna aiming ODU grounding.
27.5
27.5.1
Setting antenna polarization
Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).
224
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
27.5.2
Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.139 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use 3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).
27.5.3
Installation of 1+0 ODU support
Fig.139 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed, must be mounted with the two bushes around.
27.5.4
Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.139 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10 screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side, the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
27.5.5
Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)
Fig.140 Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.142) and reference tooth on the ODU body. Fig.143 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations. Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm spanner, torque = 6Nm).
27.5.6
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same. Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 17 mm spanner, only after having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot. Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 13 mm spanner, only after having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support. Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
27.5.7
ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with:
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
225
M8 screw without washers M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.145.
27.6
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 26.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES.
27.6.1
Installation of Hybrid
Fig.146 The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk. Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark. Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark. In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as shown in Fig.147. Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque: Tab.61 - Torques for tightening screws Frequencies from 18 to 38 GHz up to 15 GHz Screw Allen screw M3 Allen screw M4 Tool Allen key 2.5 mm Allen key 3 mm Torque 1 Nm 2 Nm
Fig.148 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten progressively and alternatively the bolts.
27.6.2
Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs. Fig.140 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.141 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization. Fig.149 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position. Fig.142 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
226
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
Centering ring Antenna
Three 3 mm Allen screws Four 13mm screws
1+0 support
Fig.150 - 1+0 pole mounting
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
227
Reference tooth O-ring ODU wave guide
"N" "BNC"
Ground bolt
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.152 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
228
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2 1
1 4 3
3 1 4
2
1 2 3 4 6 mm Allen screw M10 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm) Reference point for horizontal polarization Reference point for vertical polarization Fig.153 - 1+0 support
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
229
1+0 ODU with handle on the left: vertical polarization
1+0 ODU with handle on the right: horizontal polarization
Fig.154 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
230
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Pole support Vertical aiming 2
1 Horizontal aiming
Fig.155 - Antenna aiming
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
231
1 2 3 4 5
AL version
AS version
1 2 3 4 5
232
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7 8 1 2 4 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Oring Polarization twist disk Hybrid mechanical body Position marker of twist disk Reference label for twist disk Oring Allen screws Spring washer Fig.157 - Hybrid and twist disk
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
233
Fig.158 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)
234
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.159 - Hybrid installation
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
235
AS version
AL version
Fig.160 - 1+1 ODUs installation
236
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
28
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHZ ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)
28.1
INSTALLATION KIT
1+0 version
antisliding bracket ODU pole support and relevant screws
1+0 version
antisliding bracket ODU pole support and relevant screws hybrid and relevant screws hybridODU connecting cables
In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.62 shows the maximum bending radius.
28.2


N.2 13 mm spanner N.1 15 mm spanner N.1 17 mm spanner.
28.3
Installation procedure is listed below: 1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support 1+1 version: installation of the hybrid on the support installation of the ODU on the support ODU grounding and connection of the cables to the hybrid and antenna
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
237
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support

Fig.161 Install antisliding device (1) around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the support (2) and of the relevant hooking pin (3). Hook the support to the plastic blocks by means of the hooking pin. Insert to the four screws (4) in the relevant holes, set the two brackets (5) and clamp them around the pole tightening the four nuts (6) (tightening torque = 32 Nm). Cover the projecting bits of the screws using the relevant red covers (7). The two holes (8) house the two tightening screws of the hybrid (only for 1+1 version).
1+1 version: hybrid installation on the support

Fig.162 Set the hybrid (1) on the support (2) in such a way that the connectors are downward and that the holes on the lower side of the hybrid match with the corresponding holes (8) of the Fig.161. Insert the two screws (3) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and tighten the hybrid to the support.
ODU installation on the support

Locate the part of the support more suitable for the installation of the ODU: both the parts can be used (1+0 version). Fig.162 Locate the four slots (4) on the support (2). Fig.163 Keeping the knob of the ODU1 downward, partially screw the two screws (2) into the two upper holes of the ODU, on N connector side. Hook the heads of the two screws (2) of the Fig.163 into the slots (4) of the Fig.162. Insert also the remaining screws (2) into the holes (3). Tighten all the four screws (2) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm). Put the suncover (5) over the ODU (1) and fix it to the knob of the ODU by means of the supplied strip. In case of 1+1 version, repeat the whole procedure for the second ODU.
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna

Fig.164 Tighten the grounding cable of each ODU by means of grounding bolt (1) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and the relevant washer. For the connection of the RF cable follow the label on the bottom of the hybrid: ODU1 (RT1) is that connected to RIM1 of IDU, ODU 2 (RT2) is that connected to RIM2 of IDU.
238
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.62 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency Bending radius without rebending mm (inch) E-plane a 200 (7,9) 200 (7,9) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 130 (5,1) 110 (4,3) 80 (3,1) Bending radius without rebending mm (inch) H-plane b 500 (19,8) 500 (19,8) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 280 (11,0) 230 (9,1) 140 (5,5) Bending radius with rebending mm (inch) E-plane a. 300 (11,9) 250 (9,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 150 (5,9) 130 (5,1) 90 (3,6) Bending radius with rebending mm (inch) H-plane b. 600 (23,7) 600 (23,7) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 300 (11,9) 250 (9,9) 150 (5,9)
Frequency
b.
Bending H-plane
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
239
7 6
5 2 7 6 1 3 4 5 4
8 4 4
Fig.161 - Pole installation of the support
240
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.162 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
241
1 3 2
Fig.163 - Installation of the ODU on the support
242
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
RT2
1 RT1
Fig.164 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
243
244
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 4. LINE-UP
29
LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP
29.1
LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP
The lineup consists of the following steps: on site radio terminal installation (user connections and ODU installation as described in the relevant chapters) equipment switchon equipment configuration (through PC software) antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level network element configuration check measurements.
Equipment installation is described in Section 3. INSTALLATION.
29.1.1
Equipment configuration
In order to have the link working properly, in the local and remote equipment the same parameters have to be set: system layout (1+0, 1+1 hot stand-by, 1+1 frequency diversity.....) (Equipment - General) capacity (Equipment - General) modulation (Equipment - General) link ID (Equipment - General) RF channel (Radio - Radio Branch)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
245
The software to run is relevant to the equipment to configure: LCT in case of AL, ALC AL Plus WEB LCT in case of ALC Plus.
Traffic (Baseband - Tributary)

Used tributaries must be enabled on local and on remote equipment.
Service channels (Service Channels)

Service channels setting must be the same on local and on remote equipment: different settings of not used service channels, between local and remote equipments, cut the operation of those service channels properly set also.
In the following chapters, all the configuration steps are explained using LCT that differs from WEB LCT in graphical layout only.
29.1.2
Antenna alignment and received field measurement
Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level. Proceed as follows: connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.
The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.165. The received field level has a tolerance of 4 dB in the full temperature range.
29.1.3
Network element configuration
A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on site following the network administrator rules. To the purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the SCT/LCT program has been installed, to the network interfaces. This has to be done via serial cable or Ethernet cable. Warning: the checks that follow require a good knowledge of the program use. The description of each menu and relevant windows are given by the program itself as help on line. Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu Option the connection made via serial cable. Perform the login to the equipment by entering: Equipment IP address
3
User ID (default: SYSTEM) Password: (default: siaemicr)
Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:
If the connection is made via serial cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.
246
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
IP Address: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup>Port Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports. Press ? for details. Routing Table and Default Gateway: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup>Routing table: enter the routes or default gateway if necessary. Press ? for details. Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: manual IP/OSPF/ISIS. The relevant routing rules must be normally given by network administrator.
Remote Element Table: select menu Tools from menu bar and then Subnetwork Configuration Wizard. Station name and remote element table must be assigned following description of the contextual help online (?). Agent IP Address: select menu Equipment and then Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of the remote element you want to reach.
29.1.4
Radio checks
It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop: transmitted power received power RF frequency BER measurement
All these checks make use of the SCT/LCT program. Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check. make double click on the select equipment until main RADIO PDHAL window is shown. on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.
BER measurement Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check. Make double click on the selected equipment until main RADIO PDHAL window is shown. On the left side select BER1/2 measure. In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free. Perform the BER measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
247
3 2,625 2,25 1,875 1,5 1,125 0,75
0 -100 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20
dBm
Fig.165 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal
248
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
30
LINEUP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 MBIT/S
30.1
GENERAL
This paragraph deals with lineup of LIM Ethernet module with details of SCT/LCT program related only to Ethernet application. Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link AL, equipped with LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module, is hereafter described: 1 2 3 Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection Lam per port, see Fig.166 Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection with only VLANs 3 to 1 port connections, see Fig.179.
Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment. The software to be used depends on the equipment you have to configure. LCT for AL, ALC, AL Plus WEB LCT for ALC Plus.
In the following chapters all configuration steps are shown using LCT. LCT and WEB LCT only differs in graphical interface.
30.2
LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT
Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic
switch Lan-1 Lan-2 Lan-3 Nx2 Mbit/s Local port 1 AL radio AL radio port 1
switch Lan-1 Lan-2 Lan-3 Nx2 Mbit/s Remote
Fig.166 - Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection The lineup of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of SCT/LCT program. Please refer to Fig.167. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see Fig.168). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the Tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
249
s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex.
Fig.167 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput
250
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.168 - Tributary enable See Fig.169 for General settings for the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1 and Internal Port, see Fig.170. The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see Fig.170). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up. For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.171 incoming traffic at Lan1 exits at Internal Port and into Fig.173 incoming traffic at Internal Port exits at lan1 port. This connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into Vlan Configuration Table. If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port. Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check: 1 2 Disable 802.1q: no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings Fallback: if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets Secure: no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can transit. For all pass configuration Disable 802.1 should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the outgoing packets at Lan1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or Tagged at the incoming port.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
251
Link Loss Forwarding Histeresys
Output policy for Tagged packets: Level 2 priority, if used, defined for all the ports for incoming packets already Tagged
Click here for Port mapping and VLAN configuration table
Fig.169 - Switch general settings
Fig.170 - Lan1 interface settings
252
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.171 - Vlan settings for Lan1
Invoming Untagged packets at Lan-1 are sent into output part queue following this selection. In this example packets are inserted into queue 0
Fig.172 - Priority setting for Lan1 and Internal Port With Priority disabled no check is done into 802.1p priority Tag. All types of packets go into Default Priority Queue.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
253
Fig.173 - Vlan settings for Internal Port
Fig.174 - Vlan Configuration Table
30.3
LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT
Settings are done to transfer only Tagged traffic within some Vlans. We want that Vlan 701, 702, 710 and 1, 2, 3 can pass into the radio link and all the other Tagged or Untagged packets should be blocked. 254
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
The line up of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT program. Please refer to Fig.166. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depends on terms of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select tributary window (see Fig.167). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. for instance with a 16 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to ethernet circuits is automatically set to 162x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex. See Fig.168 for general settings for the switch. All the used ports must be enabled, so enable Lan1 and Internal Port, see Fig.169. The other port should be disabled. The correct Cable crossover arrangement must be selected too. Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up. Vlan settings for Lan1 and Internal Port should be like in Fig.175 with Ingress Filtering Check as Secure and Engress Mode as Tagged. With this setting only Tagged packets with Vlan ID listed into the Vlan Configuration Table can transit. All Untagged packets are blocked at the incoming port and outgoing Tagged packets dont change. A packet with Vlan ID XX can enter into the switch only if Incoming Port (Ingress port) is a member of the Vlan XX, same packet will exit only from ports (Engress Port) which are members of Vlan XX. Vlan membership is described into Vlan Configuration Table. A port can be member of no one, one or more Vlans. See Fig.176 for Vlan Configuration Table settings for our example.
Fig.175 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan1 port
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
255
Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans Tagged incoming packet can be treated with FIFO policy or on the basis of their 802.1p priority tag and ToS/DSCP value for IP packets. There are 4 queue at each output port. The decision about to which output queue to send a packet is defined into Ethernet switch window selections for 802.1p tag. Into Ethernet switch window it is possible to select ToS/DSCP button to open window ToS/DSCP, in this window each incoming ToS/DSCP value is associated with an output queue so it is possible to change the priority of the incoming packet. When no info on priority is available, the packet is sent to Default Priority Queue using FIFO policy. Into Lan1 window select Priority (802.1q), into priority box there are some selections: with Disable switch doesnt look at priority tag; with 802.1p switch looks at Tag 802.1p only; with IpToS for IP packets only switch looks to ToS/DSCP identifier (into IP frame) only; with 802.1p IpToS switch looks first to 802.1p tag and secondly to ToS/DSCP, see Fig.178; with IpToS802.1p switch looks first to ToS/DSCP and secondly to Tag 802.1p. Note: with IpToS switch looks to IP packet and ToS/DSCP doesnt matter if the packets are tagged with 802.1p or not. In this example incoming tagged are tagged and it is necessary to transfer the packets with no change so they must exit from output ports tagged, see Fig.176 and Fig.177.
Fig.177 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged
256
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Incoming Untagged packets at Lan-1 are sent into output part queue following this selection. In this example packets are inserted into queue 0.
Fig.178 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management
30.4
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS
switch Lan-1 Lan-2 Lan-3 Nx2 Mbit/s Local

Fig.179 - 3 to 1 port connections
switch port 1 AL radio AL radio port 1 Lan-1 Lan-2 Lan-3 Nx2 Mbit/s Remote
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding remote ports. All the ports share the same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa. Lan1 to Lan1 connection should transfer tagged packets with Vlan 1, 701, 760 and untagged packets. Unspecified tagged packets must be stopped. Lan2 and Lan3 have the same requirements. For all connections IP packets with high priority TOS should transferred at minimum delay.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
257
30.5
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC
The lineup of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT. Please refer to Fig.166. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see Fig.167). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/ output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex. Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan1, Lan2, Lan3 to Port1. All the used ports must be Enabled. Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port. See Fig.168, Fig.169, Fig.178, Fig.179, Fig.180. Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID in order to maintain the traffic coming from different separated LANs, Lan1 with default VID 3301, Lan2 with default VID 3302, Lan3 with default VID 3303, for Lan1 see Fig.180, Fig.181 and Fig.183. The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.
Fig.180 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan1 port
258
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.181 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301
Vlan 3301, 3302, 3303 are allowed to exit at Port1 with tags (Tagged). Different default Tags allow to keep separate the traffic from Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3 exiting at Port 1. At the remote end the traffic is split and forwarded from Port1 to Lan1, Lan 2 and Lan3 without Tag to preserve the original format.
Default VID assigned by user to each port
Fig.182 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration With the above settings inside the VLAN configuration Table only Untagged traffic is forwarded accross the bridge. The same settings should be done inside the remote equipment. The above example shows the Virtual Lan Configuration Table in case of a link carrying the traffic of 3 independent LANs connected to Lan1, Lan 2, Lan3, which is split at the remote end among the outgoing Lan1, Lan2, Lan3 ports, while using a common radio link. To prioritize some IP packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue, see Fig.183.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
259
TOS value description
DSCP value description Packets with AF43 priority level will go into Queue 3 at all ports
AF43 now goes to Queue 3, with this button AF43 will go to Queue 2
Fig.183 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority
30.6
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC
If we want VLAN with Tag 701, 702 and 703 to transit between Lan1 and Port1 it is necessary to define Port 1 and Lan 1 as members of VLAN1, 701, 760 (see Fig.184 for VLAN 701 and do the same for VLAN1, 760). The VLAN Configuration Table will look like Fig.185. For Lan2 and Lan3 we cannot use the same Vlan if we want to maintain traffic from Lan 1, 2, 3 separated. We must change the number of incoming Vlan for instance of 1, 701, 760 use 2001, 2701, 2760 for Lan 2 and 3001, 3701, 3760 for Lan3. Connected equipment to Lan2 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 2001, 2701, 2760. Connected equipment to Lan3 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 3001, 3701, 3760. To prioritize Ip packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue 3, see Fig.181. The same should be done inside the remote equipment.
260
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.184 - Output properties of VLAN 701
Fig.185 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan
30.7
3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT
Example 1: To assign to Lan1 and Lan3 low priority and to Lan2 high priority, while wanting Tagged and Untagged to be treated in a fair manner on each queue do as follow: select Priority Disable for Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3; select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 0 for lan1 and Lan3 (see Fig.172). Select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 3 for Lan2 (as in Fig.186). Outgoing Untagged packets will take priority tag defined into input port, in this case 0. Tagged frames keep their tag.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
261
Example 2: Wanting tagged frames to be treated according their actual priority and untagged packets with low priority, all inputs should be configured as in Fig.187. Layer 2 Priority assignment is not modified if inside the second folder of the LanX (1, 2, 3) configuration window Untagged Frame Egress Mode = Unmodified is selected as in Fig.188.
Untagged packet arriving to Lan-2 are sent to output port Queues setting of this folder. In this example all incoming packets at LAN-2 are inserted into output Queue 3 of output ports. Input priority: when Disable is not selected, Tagged frame are sent to queue 0,1,2,3 to port destination priority value; when Disabled is selected for this port switch uses the Default Priority Queue for Tagged and Untagged frames, and without really changing Tag into Incoming Tagged frames.
Fig.186 - Queue selection
262
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.187 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag
Fig.188 - Incoming packets at Lan1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
263
31
LINEUP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT
31.1
GENERAL
This paragraph deals with lineup of LIM for east/west repeater with details of SCT/LCT program related only to cross connection facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix. Assuming that the radio link is already in service, the following items are described: baseband configuration east or west configuration east or west presetting tributary enabling one direction tributary connection protected tributary connection (drop/insert) protection setting (Rx tributary switch). pass through E1 connection
The 2 Mbit/s streams connected to front panel of cross connection unit are called Tributaries while the 2 Mbit/s streams connected to matrix east side or west side are called E1.
31.2
BASEBAND CONFIGURATION
Operations4 to enable the facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix are the following: inside LCT, open Equipment General window as in Fig.189. in Baseband Configuration field, select EW 16x2.
Each command has to be applied and confirmed (push Apply button and Confirm button)
264
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.189 - Baseband configuration
31.3
EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION
Operations to configure the radio link toward one direction are the following: inside LCT, open Equipment General East (or West) window as in Fig.190 select proper parameters in Capacity&Modulation Scheme field and right Link ID in Local Link ID field (0 means not used).
Configuration of one direction can be different respect the other: if different capacities are selected, number of passthrough connection depend on this.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
265
Fig.190 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction
31.4
EAST OR WEST PRESETTING
In case of bad quality of Rx signal from one direction, HBER on east or west branch, some features can be enabled: inside LCT as in Fig.191, open Equipment, open Gen. Preset East (or West) and: in order to insert AIS in case of HBER: select Enable in Hber > Rx Ais Ins Rx Sw field in order to insert AIS in case of hardware failure in Rx: select Enable in Ais Rx Insertion field in order to cut the signal of service channels in case of HBER: select Enable in Service Squelch field
266
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.191 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction
31.5
TRIBUTARY ENABLING
In order to enable/disable the tributaries connected to the crossconnection unit, inside LCT as in Fig.192, open Base Band, open Tributary and click on central square of each tributary: central line open: the tributary is disabled central line closed: the tributary is enabled.
If the rectangle with a little black triangle is clicked, four alarms relevant the tributary appear: AIS, BER (BER = 106), OOF (Out Of Frame), OOMF (Out of MultiFrame).
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
267
Fig.192 - Tributary enabling window
31.6
ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
The procedure to enable one tributary connection towards one direction is the following: inside LCT as in Fig.193 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot of the tributary on the slot relevant the desired E1.
Fig.193 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s
268
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
31.7
PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
A protected tributary connection is a tributary connection towards both direction where one direction is a protection for the other (a sort of Drop/Insert in a PDH ring). Procedure: inside LCT as in Fig.194 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot relevant the tributary z on the slot relevant the desired E1 x first in one direction and after for the other on the slot relevant the desired E1 y. Position of involved E1 can be different (for example: x y z).
Fig.194 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/s
31.8
PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH)
In a protected tributary connection one direction can be the preferential in Rx E1 switch or can be selected manually. Protection policy setting: inside LCT as in Fig.195, open Cross Connection, select Configuration and double click the tributary slot whose protection policy we want to set. Preferential switch: Auto One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without alarms E1 East E1 east is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms E1 West E1 west is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms
Forced switch: Auto One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without alarms E1 East E1 east is selected E1 West E1 west is selected.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
269
Fig.195 - Protection policy of a tributary stream
31.9
PASSTHROUGH E1 CONNECTION
A passthrough E1 connection is a connection between one East E1 stream and one West E1 stream. How to set a Passthrough E1 connection: inside LCT as in Fig.196, open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot relevant the East E1 on the slot relevant the West E1. East and West E1 can be different.
Fig.196 - East/West Passthrough connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/s
270
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
32
LINE-UP OF THE LINK WITH NODAL IDU
32.1
OVERVIEW
The following paragraph deals with the activation of the NODAL IDU unit with details of the SCT/LCT program relevant to the functionalities offered by the cross-connection matrix in relation to the achievable connections. Supposing that the radio links are already commissioned, the following items are described: Tributaries on line side and tributaries on radio side Tributaries on line side and other tributaries on line side (protected and unprotected buses included) Tributaries on radio side and other tributaries on radio side
32.2
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
The operations to enable the functionalities offered by the internal cross-connection matrix are the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 run the software LCT, open Equipment, Configurator as in Fig.197 configure the IDU as 2U, Drop Insert, Matrix (with relevant tributaries) configure the radio links: Radio A (1A and 2A, with 2x(1+0)) and Radio B (1B and 2B, with 2x(1+0)) configure the LIM: Processor define the IDU you are configuring: No Nodal (single nodal IDU), Node A, Node B, Node C configure the node type: 2 Elems, 3 Elems configure the type of BUS connecting the IDUs: No Protec. (NBUS 1 and 2 -> transport of 126 E1 each), Protec. (single NBUS-> transport of 126 E1)
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
271
Fig.197 - Configurator
32.3
TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION
The operations to enable the tributaries involved in the cross-connections with the matrix are: run the software LCT, open BaseBand, Tributaries and select the type of used tributary enable the E1 and/or STM-1 tributaries (transport of 63 E1 each) involved by the cross-connection. To route an E1 stream to remote equipment, a Tributary - Radio cross-connection must be created, the enabling of the stream itself is not sufficient. in case of STM-1 streams, configure the parameters VC4 and VC12 and the synchronization parameters (LCT, Synchronisation)
32.4
Configuration of the Cross-connection matrix
The operations to configure a cross-connection are: run the software LCT, open Cross Connection, Matrix and press Configuration select the type of cross-connection: Tributary - Radio : Cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of the Matrix module (E1, STM-1, NBUS or NBUS1 and 2) and the tributaries available on the radio Link, 1A, 2A, 1B or 2B (it depends on the capacity set on the radio Link)
272
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tributary - Tributary : Cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of the Matrix module (E1, STM-1, NBUS or NBUS1 and 2)
32.4.1
Tributary - Radio Cross-connection
The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are: select the type of tributary to use on the front side of the Matrix module: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the window together with the number of E1 streams relevant to the radio Link select which radio Link you wish to use in the cross-connection (up to four available) move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector of the Matrix module) by dragging and dropping from a type of tributary to the position to use in the radio frame, see Fig.198. the first create cross-connection is the main (colour blue); a second one regarding the same E1 tributary can be created to the radio Link B with the same modality. The second cross-connection will be the reserve (colour pink) of the first one. The parameters, and the possible alarms, ruling the switch between the two radio directions can be configured in the window which can be opened by a double click on the box relevant to the E1 tributary on matrix side, see Fig.199 the tributaries in the radio frame (Link direction A or others) can be involved in a tributary loop towards the corresponding remote radio by means of a double click on the relevant box that points out the position in the frame, see Fig.200 the tributaries on radio side can transit directly from a radio link to the other without need to pass from the tributaries on matrix side: by means of drag'n'drop, a box relevant to an E1 on radio side is moved from a Link to the other Link. The two involved Links must be selected in the fields 1st Radio and 2nd Radio. A pass-through (transit) cross-connection is so executed: see Fig.201 to delete a cross-connection, move it to the trash to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.
Fig.198 - Radio/Tributary
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
273
Fig.199 - Switch parameters of the cross-connections
Fig.200 - Tributary loop on radio side
274
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.201 - Radio/radio cross-connection
32.4.2
Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection
The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are: 1 select the two types of tributary (1st Tributary and 2nd Tributary) on the front side of the Matrix module to use as ends: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the top and bottom part of the window move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connector on the Matrix module) by means of the drag'n'drop from a tributary type to another, see Fig.202. to delete a cross-connection, move to the trash to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.
2 3 4
This type of cross-connection includes even those relevant to the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU to another one belonging to the same node. Remember that, in case of protected NBUS connections, there is not distinction between NBUS1 and 2, while the single generic NBUS connection will be displayed. The configuration of the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU to another one belonging to the same node must be executed on both the involved nodal IDUs.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
275
Fig.202 - Tributary/Tributary Cross-connection
276
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
33
HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION
33.1
1 2 3 4 5
PROCEDURE
Set new addresses on remote equipment Clear the Stored Routing Table on remote equipment and add new lines to it Set the new Agent and restart remote equipment Configure Local equipment Prepare Subnetwork on local equipment, capture the remote equipment and send it the new subnetork
Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Port Configuration
Fig.203 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
277
Configuration
Configure: IP Ethernet ->Ip address and netmask (see Fig.204) Lct PPP -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.205) PPP Radio -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.206) If you have other port to configure ex. PPP RS232 - 2Mbit/s EOC ecc. configure it with IP and netmask
Fig.204 - IP Ethernet
278
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.205 - LCT PPP
Fig.206 - PPP Radio At the end select Set Values -> Confirm and Store -> Confirm.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
279
Select the equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Stored Routing Table
Fig.207 - Store Routing Table In this menu delete all lines and default gateway, push Apply and then Save.
280
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.208 - Stored Routing Table Add new routine lines (relevant the new addresses configuration) pushing the Add button. When the Stored Routing Table is complete, push Apply and then Save.
Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Properties. Set new Agent (equal to Ethernet port address). Push Restart and then Confirm. After the restart, the Remote Equipment disappears from SCT display.
Configure the local equipment

Configure the local equipment with the same procedure seen before. Then restart the local equipment.
Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

To see both local and remote equipments the new subnetwork (station and equipments) must be prepared. Select menu Tools -> Subnetwork Configuration Wizard.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
281
Fig.209 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
282
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.210 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration
Push Add Station, write its name and push OK.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
283
Fig.211 - Add new station
Select this new station and push Add Element. The Ip Address to set is the Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
284
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.212 - Add New Network Element
After having set the Equipment Address, push OK. The new element is created inside the previously created station This step must be done for local and remote equipment.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
285
Fig.213 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard Select the local equipment (the one with System (Local) )
286
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.214 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
Send the configuration to local equipment. When the remote equipment appears in Actual Configuration, prepare again the network configuration you have set before (or select the local equipment, push Retrieve) and send the configuration to remote equipment.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
287
288
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 5. MAINTENANCE
34
PERIODICAL CHECKS
34.1
GENERAL
Periodical checks are used to check correct operation of the radio equipment without the presence of any alarm condition. The SCT/LCT programs running on the PC are used for the purpose.
34.2
CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT
The following checks must be carried out: check of the transmitted power; check of the received field strength (the reading must match the value resulting from hop calculations); check of the bit error ratio and the hop performances.
For checking procedures, please refer to SCT/LCT program and relevant helpon line.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
289
35
TROUBLESHOOTING
35.1
GENERAL
The AL equipment consists of the following replaceable parts: LIM RIM CONTROLLER ODU.
Purpose of the troubleshooting is to pinpoint the faulty part and replace it with spare. Warning: the replacement of the faulty CONTROLLER module with spare causes the spare CONTROLLER to be reprogrammed. To the purpose refer to chapter 26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) and 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323) for the relevant procedure.
35.2
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Troubleshooting starts as soon as one of the following alarm condition: IDU/ODU/REM is switched ON on the IDU panel from (see Fig.215) or alarm messages are displayed by managers SCT/LCT. Two methods are used to troubleshoot the cause of fault: loop facilities alarm message processing using the manager SCT/LCT
35.2.1
Loop facilities
The equipment is provided with different loops with the aid to locate the faulty equipment and then the faulty module the equipment consists of. Warning: the majority of loops causes the traffic to be lost. The available loops are the following: local tributary loops: usually used to test the cables interfacing the equipment upstreams remote tributary loops: usually used to test the two direction link performance making use of an unused 2 Mbit/s signal. baseband loop: it permits to test the LIM circuits IDU loop: it permits to test the complete IDU RF loop: it permits to test the complete radio terminal
290
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
35.2.2
Alarm messages processing
When an alarm condition occurs, the equipment generates a number of alarm messages that appear on the SCT windows ie: log history area and equipment view current alarm. Investigation on the alarm message meaning permits to troubleshoot the faulty module.
Alarm message organisation

The alarms (traps) are organized as alarm grouping relevant to a specific functions performed by the equipment. The alarm grouping is available only in the view current alarm submenu. What follows is the list of the alarm grouping: COMMON alarms which are not related to a specific part of the equipment but relevant to the link as EOC radio link alarm or link telemetry fail. If these alarms are ON the link is lost. Investigation must be made on a possible bad propagation or equipment failure. See the condition of the others alarm grouping. LIM This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes: external fault: tributary loss signal LIM failure: i.e. multiplexer/demultiplexer failure or modulator/demodulator failure. Warning: The modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substitution method is the only way to pingpoint the faulty module alarm that can be propagated by RIM or ODU modules as baseband Rx alarm. The Baseband loop permits to discover if the cause of this alarm activation is external or internal to the LIM. If yes the module must be replaced.
RIM This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes: external fault: demodulator fail alarm and local ODU alarm are generated when the ODU becomes faulty. RIM failure power supply alarm along with cable short/open alarms or modulator/demodulator alarms are activated. Warning: the modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substitution methods is the only way to pinpoint the faulty module.
RT This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes: external fault: Rx power low alarm is generated given by a bad propagation or by a faulty remote terminal. ODU failure: PSU fail alarm or RF VCO alarm or RT IF alarm is activated. If this happens, replace the ODU.
UNIT This grouping generates alarms when one of the units, the equipment consists of, is faulty or does not respond to the controller polling. Replace the faulty unit. CONTROLLER There is not an alarm message relevant to a controller module failure. An alarm condition causes Led IDU to steady lights up. Warning: The replacement of controller module requires the spare to be realigned (see chapter 26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) or 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)).
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s
2Mb/s FAIL
1 UNITA'
Trib: A-B-C-D
Trib: E-F-G-H
LCT
USER IN/OUT
RS232
Trib: I-J-K-L IDU ODU A R Q3 REM TEST
Trib: M-N-O-P TX RX 1 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
Alarm area
Fig.215 - IDU front
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
291
36
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/ DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.
36.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to create configuration files. Equipment configuration files must be used in case of replacing a faulty CONTROLLER module with the spare. To the purpose it is necessary to upload, from each equipment the network consists of, equipment configurations and save them on three configuration files. It is advisable to do it upon the first installation. Configuration file download on the spare CONTROLLER permits to restore previous operating condition. It is also possible to create virtual configuration without being connected to equipment.
36.2
PROCEDURE
To configure the spare CONTROLLER the following must be uploaded/saved on the file/downloaded: general equipment configuration addresses and routing table remote element table
To do it, run the SCT/LCT program (see relevant documentation available on line) until Subnetwork Craft Terminal application window is displayed.
36.2.1
General equipment configuration
Upload and save

1 Select Open Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment Configuration Wizard File Open Configuration Template. The system will show Template Selection window. Choose from Template Selection window the type of equipment and version (for instance radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) from which you want to make the upload. Press OK. The system will display the Configuration Wizard window referring to the selected type of equipment and version (example: radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment. The system will display the Upload Configuration File window. The window will show the equipment list. Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration file from (normally the local equipment) by activating the relevant box.
2 3
292
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: the operation status: upload in progress/complete. errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
At the end of the operation by pressing OK, the system displays, the uploaded equipment parameters present into the Configuration Wizard window. 7 Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save Save File As. The system will display Save This Config. File. Type the file name into the proper box (with cfg extension) and set the path to be used to save the file. Press Save push button to finish.
Download
After having installed the spare LIM proceed as follows: 1 Select Open File from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu Equipment Configuration Wizard File Open Open File. The system will display Select a Config. File window. Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the file content. Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File. Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the local equipment) and select Configure Equipment as Current File. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: 6 the operation status: upload in progress/completed errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of operation are displayed.
2 3 4 5
Press OK to finish.
36.2.2
Addresses and routing table
Upload and save

1 Select Open Address Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu Equipment Configuration Wizard File Open Open Address Configuration Template. The system will show the mask of the Address Configuration Template. Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment. The system will display the Upload Configuration File window. Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration from (normally the local equipment). Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: the operation status: upload in progress errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
2 3 4
At the end of the operation, the system displays, the equipment parameter present into the Configuration Wizard window. 5 Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save Save File As
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
293
The system will display the Save This Config. File window. Into the proper boxes type the file name (with cfg extension) and set the path to be used to save the file. 6 Press Save push button to finish.
Download
1 Select Open File command from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment Configuration Wizard File Open Open File. The system will display Select a Config. File window. Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the parameters contained into the file. Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File. Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the local equipment). Press OK. The system will display Download Type Selection window. Activate boxes IP port addresses configuration e Routing table. If OSPF facility is enabled, you can only select Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) Settings. Press OK. The system will show a warning indicating the possibility to proceed the download or not. Press OK. The system will show the Download in progress. At the end of the download will be shown the file content.
2 3 4 5
6 7 8
36.2.3
Remote Element Table
Upload and save

1 2 3 4 Select window Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Select equipment Local from Actual Configuration Area and then press Retrieve. In New configuration area is shown the list of remote equipment included the local. Press Save to file. The system will show window Save remote element configuration file. Save the file with Rel extension and then press Save to finish.
Download
1 2 3 4 5 Select Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tool. Press Read from file and then select the desired file (with Rel extension). Press Open push button and then the system will show the file content into the New Configuration Area. Select into the Actual configuration area the equipment you desire to download, the list of the remote element included the local. Press Send to send the list.
294
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
37
BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
37.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.
37.2
CONFIGURATION UPLOAD
Foreword: it is advisable to upload the configuration during the first installation. Proceed as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed. Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted). Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear. The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload will appear the word done showing the procedure success. Press OK to finish.
37.3
CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD
Once the spare LIM has been installed proceed as follows: 1 2 3 4 Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed. Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration File window will be displayed. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The word done indicates that download has been successfully. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
295
296
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
38
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
38.1
GENERAL
The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised. The following tools are implemented to the purpose: SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 AL radio equipment. NMS5UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of different SIAE equipment including AL family radio equipment.
For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help online.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
297
298
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 7. COMPOSITION
39
COMPOSITION OF MODULAR IDU
39.1
GENERAL
The IDU is available in following versions: 1+0 unduplicated 1+0/1+1 standard (see Fig.216) 1+1 ethernet high and low capacity 1+1 full duplicated 1+1 high capacity (see Fig.217) 2+0 repeater E/W (see Fig.218).
The 1+0 version is considered the minimum replaceable part while the 1+1 standard/full duplicated consists of plugin modules as LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER that can individually be replaced. Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
39.2
IDU PART NUMBER
Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.220) attached on IDU, top left side. Important power supply informations are also written. The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
299
Tab.63- IDU part number Digit 1 2 3 Letter/number G A I 0001 0002 0003 0004 0052 0054 00611 0062 0066 0153 Meaning Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure AL equipment Indoor installation 1+1 1 unit 120 ohm BNC 1+1 1 unit 120 ohm RJ45 1+1 1 unit 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3 1+0 1 unit 120 ohm RJ45 1+1 2 unit 120 ohm BNC Full protected 1+1 2 unit 75 ohm BNC 32x2 1.0/2.3 1+1 1 unit Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 64 Mbit/s RJ45 2+0 2 unit E/W 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3 1+1 1 unit Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 100 Mbit/s RJ45 1+1 - 1 unit - 16E1 + FE
4 to 7
39.3
COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT
1+0/1+1 standard, Ethernet version

The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N. The P/Ns are the following: LIM D12034 option SUB_D 75 ohm D12035 option SUBD 120 ohm D1203602 option 1.0/2.3/75 ohm D1208902 Ethernet 64 Mbit/s (low capacity) D12100 Ethernet 100 Mbit/s (high capacity) D12168 Ethernet (4FE + 16E1) D12037 D26000 100 Mbit/s D12031 D12032 D12033 D12095 RJ45 BNC AUI RJ45 (for D12168)
RIM CONTROLLER
1+1 2 units
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N. LIM RIM CONTROLLER D1203602 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm D12086 expansion trib. 17 to 32 75 Ohm D12037 D12031 D12032 D12033 D12094 RJ45 BNC AUI coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)
300
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2+0 2 units
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N. LIM RIM CONTROLLER D12089 matrix in AL E/W 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm D1205202 processor unit D12037 D12094 coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)
FAIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 11 10 12 IDUODU TX RX 1 A R 2 REM TEST 13 14 15 16 WAY SIDE CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
+ +
Fig.216 - Standard IDU GAI0003
FAIL 1 FAIL 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
++ +
Q3 LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT
IDUODU TX RX 1 R 2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
WAY SIDE
REMTEST
Fig.217 - IDU GAI0054
FAIL
RIM 1 2 RIM RIM 1 RIM 2
FAIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FAIL IDUODU TX RX Q3 LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT A REMTEST CH1 CH2 2Mb/s WAY SIDE
10-100 BaseT
DPX FAIL
48V RIM 1 RIM 2
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16 A Q3
1 IDU ODU R REM TEST
2 TX RX 1 2 CH1
LINK ACT WAY SIDE
+
48V
RIM 1 RIM 2
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH2
2Mb/s
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
301
Fig.220 - IDU P/N
302
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
40
COMPOSITION OF COMPACT IDU
40.1
GENERAL
The Compact IDU is offered in the following versions: 1+0 1+1.
40.2
ALC IDU PART NUMBER
The IDU is available in different versions, each of one identified by a specific part number. This P/N is shown on a label attached on the IDU mechanical structure, top left side. The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning: Tab.64 - P/N meaning Digit 1 2 3 Letter/number G A I 0069 0073 0076 0078 0079 0080 0081 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091 Meaning Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure AL family Indoor installation 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1EOW 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+0 16x2 - coax - 1+0 8x2 - 75 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 16x2 - 120 - 1+1 8x2 - 75 - 1+1 16x2 - 120 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 EOW 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 EOW 4x2 - 120 - 1+0 V28 4x2 - 120 - 1+1 V28 16x2 - CX - 1+1 Eth
4 to 7
This part number together with unit serial number is printed on a label, SIAE or custom, positioned on unit cover.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
303
41
COMPOSITION OF IDU COMPACT PLUS (ALC PLUS)
41.1
OVERVIEW
The IDU Compact Plus is available in the following versions: 1+0 1+1.
41.2
PART NUMBER OF IDU
The IDU Plus Compact is available in different versions, each one identified by a specific part number. This P/N is reported on a plate attached to the mechanical structure of the IDU, up to the left. The P/N is composed by seven digits with the following meaning: Digit 1 2 3 Letter/number G A I 0118 0119 0120 0121 0128 Meaning Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure PDH family Indoor installation 16E1 16E1 32E1 32E1 32E1 1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 1+1 + 3ETH
from 4 to 7
This part number with the serial number of the unit is printed on a plate, of SIAE or of the customer, placed on the cover of the unit.
304
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
42
COMPOSITION OF IDU PLUS
42.1
GENERAL
The IDU Plus is available in 1RU and 2RU. Main configurations are: terminal drop/insert nodal.
Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition can change without notice.
42.2
IDU PLUS PART NUMBER
Each version id identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.227), attached on IDU, top left side. Important power supply information are also written. The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning: Tab.65 Digit 1 2 3 Letter/number G A I 0115 0116 0123 0124 0126 0141
- IDU Plus part number

Description Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure AL equipment Indoor installation 1RU, 32E1, 1+0 terminal 1RU, 32E1, 1+1 terminal 2RU, 53E1, 1+1 terminal 2RU, STM1, E1 nodal 2RU, 32E1, drop/insert 1RU, 24E1 + Ethernet, 1+1 terminal
from 4 to 7
42.3
COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS
The IDU Plus consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER/MATRIX modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
305
The P/Ns are the following: LIM D12139 53x2 processor D12137 LIM 32E1 D12164 + Ethernet D26001 D12146 Matrix node STM1 16E1 D12148 Equipment controller
RIM MATRIX EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
Subrack can be 1RU (see Fig.221) or 2RU (see Fig.222) high. 1 2 Fig.221 - IDU Plus 1RU composition 1 2 3 4 Fig.222 - IDU Plus 2RU composition 5 6 7 8 3 4
42.3.1
1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal
The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
Example: GAI 0115

position 1 position 2 position 3 LIM RIM Eq. controller D12137 D26001 D12148
42.3.2
1+1 1RU 24E1 Terminal
Example: GAI 0141

position 1 position 3 position 4 position 2 LIM RIM RIM Eq. controller D12164 D26001 D26001 D12148
306
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
10-100 BaseT
DPX FAIL
48V
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24 Q3/2 Q3/1 A
1 IDUODU R REM TEST
LINK ACT WAY SIDE
+ +
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.223 - 24E1 1+1 terminal
42.3.3
1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal
Example: GAI 0116

position 1 position 3 position 4 position 2 LIM RIM RIM Eq. controller D12137 D26001 D26001 D12148
FAIL
+
WAY SIDE
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16 Q3/2 Q3/1
Trib: 17-24 A IDU ODU R REM TEST CH1
Trib: 25-32
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.224 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal
42.3.4
1+1 terminal 2RU 53E1
Example: GAI 0123

position 1 position 2 position 3 position 5 position 6
Q3/2 Q3/1 A LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT REM TEST IDU ODU R CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
Eq. controller LIM 53E1 expansion RIM RIM

WAY SIDE
D12148 D12137 D12151 D26001 D26001
+
FAIL FAIL
Trib: 33-40
Trib: 41-48
Trib: 49-53
Fig.225 - 53E1 1+1 terminal
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24
Trib: 25-32
307
42.3.5
2RU 32E1 drop/insert
Example: GAI 0126

position 1 position 2 position 3 position 5,6 Eq. controller 53E1 processor Matrix 32E1 RIM D12148 D12139 D12143 D26001
Q3/2
Q3/1 A
WAY SIDE
+
FAIL
LCT
RS232
USER IN/OUT
FAIL Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
Fig.226 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1
42.3.6
Nodal 2RU STM1 E1
The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N. position 1 position 2 position 3 position 4 position 5,6,7,8 Eq. controller 53E1 processor D12148 D12139
Matrix node STM1 16E1D12146 53E1 processor RIM D12139 D26001
Fig.227 - IDU Plus P/N
308
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
43
COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT
43.1
GENERAL
The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 version the connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid. Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the antenna configuration etc... A label (see Fig.228) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return frequency value, subband, operating band and part number. From ODU name (e.g. AL18 or AS18) you can see the version of used ODU. For example the P/N GA0001/001, shown by the label, identifies the following: AL18 G/R SB S/N DATA CODE 18 GHz operating band 1010 MHz go/return frequency value 1L operating subband low serial number month and year
A further label is available attached on the hybrid body as per example of Fig.229. It shows the position of each transceiver and the type of coupler, balanced or unbalanced. Warning: In case of unbalanced type the lowest loss is always referred to branch 1. In Tab.66 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed. Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
Tab.66 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number RF Band in GHz 13 18 23 38 ODU 1L GA9018 GA9000 GA9006 GA9014 1H GA9019 GA9001 GA9007 GA9015 Hybrid with support Balanced V32218 V32184 V32186 V32210 Unbalanced V32219 V32185 V32187 V32230
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
309
Fig.228 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL
310
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.229 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
311
312
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 8. LISTS AND SERVICES
44
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 14 Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 14 Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 14 Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 14 Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 15 Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna ............................................ 26 Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity ........................................................ 26 Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity with 4x10/100BaseT ports ................... 26 Fig.9 - Compact IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s with 3x10/100BaseT ports ..................................... 26 Fig.10 - Modular IDU PLUS 1+0/1+1 - up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity........................................ 27 Fig.11 - Modular IDU Plus 1+1 - up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports ........... 27 Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus nodal with matrix - up to 16x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity .......... 27 Fig.13 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)................................................................ 27 Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU Modular configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors ......................... 33 Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU Modular Ethernet tributary connectors .................................................. 33 Fig.16 - 1+1 IDU Modular D type tributary connectors ..................................................... 33 Fig.17 - 1+1 Modular IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s) ..................................................................... 33 Fig.18 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors ...... 34 Fig.19 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration D type tributary connectors............... 34 Fig.20 - IDU Modular Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s....................................................................... 34 Fig.21 - IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodal 4+0 ..................................... 34 Fig.22 IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s).......................................................... 34 Fig.23 - IDU Compact 1+0 (2x2/4x2 Mbit/s) ..................................................................... 34
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
313
Fig.24 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)....................................................... 35 Fig.25 - IDU Compact 1+1 (coax. connector up to 16x2 Mbit/s) + Ethernet module ............... 35 Fig.26 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH) ................................................................. 35 Fig.27 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)............................................................................. 35 Fig.28 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting) ............................................ 35 Fig.29 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna.................................................................... 36 Fig.30 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 36 Fig.31 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 37 Fig.32 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)............................................. 38 Fig.33 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna ................................................................... 39 Fig.34 - LIM block diagram Tx side................................................................................ 53 Fig.35 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing.......................................................... 54 Fig.36 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 54 Fig.37 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 54 Fig.38 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 55 Fig.39 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing ............................................................... 56 Fig.40 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing ........................................................................ 57 Fig.41 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s ............................................................... 57 Fig.42 - LIM block diagram Rx side ............................................................................... 58 Fig.43 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 59 Fig.44 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 60 Fig.45 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 61 Fig.46 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 62 Fig.47 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 75 Fig.48 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 76 Fig.49 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 76 Fig.50 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 77 Fig.51 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram .................................................................... 78 Fig.52 - Tag control into field .......................................................................................... 79 Fig.53 - Output queues .................................................................................................. 79 Fig.54 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets .................................................................. 79 Fig.55 - ToS/DSCP......................................................................................................... 80 Fig.56 - IDU + 1RU composition ...................................................................................... 83 Fig.57 - IDU + 2RU composition ...................................................................................... 84 Fig.58 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure ........................................................ 86 Fig.59 - Nodal connections in 3 subracks .......................................................................... 88 Fig.60 - Nodal connections in 2 subracks .......................................................................... 88 Fig.61 - Nodal - 12 max radio directions, max 6xstm-1, max 48E1 all disconnecting, no blocking . 89 Fig.62 - LIM block diagram - Tx side ................................................................................ 98 Fig.63 - LIM block diagram - Rx side ................................................................................ 99 Fig.64 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 100 Fig.65 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 101
314
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.66 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 101 Fig.67 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................. 102 Fig.68 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH).............................................................. 103 Fig.69 - IDU for E/W repeater ....................................................................................... 104 Fig.70 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix .............................................. 108 Fig.71 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 112 Fig.72 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 113 Fig.73 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 114 Fig.74 - IDU E/W loops ................................................................................................ 115 Fig.75 - 1+0 AL ODU .................................................................................................. 121 Fig.76 - 1+1 AL ODU ................................................................................................... 121 Fig.77 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version ...................................................................... 122 Fig.78 - ODU block diagram (both versions).................................................................... 123 Fig.79 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna ............................................................................. 124 Fig.80 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas ........................................................................... 124 Fig.81 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 125 Fig.82 - DC/DC converter front coverplate ...................................................................... 126 Fig.83 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0 ............................................... 128 Fig.84 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1 ............................................... 129 Fig.85 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 134 Fig.86 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s ................................... 135 Fig.87 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT ........ 136 Fig.88 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT....... 136 Fig.89 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)..................................................... 140 Fig.90 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 32x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 144 Fig.91 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 144 Fig.92 - Nodal IDU Plus 2 units - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1, 4+0 version ................................... 145 Fig.93 - Modular IDU Plus - 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT............................................. 145 Fig.94 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 146 Fig.95 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)........................................................................... 151 Fig.96 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH) ............................................................... 151 Fig.97 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 152 Fig.98 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 161 Fig.99 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 162 Fig.100 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole .......................................................................... 163 Fig.101 - Mounting position .......................................................................................... 164 Fig.102 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism...................... 165 Fig.103 - Band-it pole mounting kit................................................................................ 166 Fig.104 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate................................................ 167 Fig.105 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 168 Fig.106 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 169 Fig.107 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version .................................................................. 170
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
315
Fig.108 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 171 Fig.109 - Kit V32409.................................................................................................... 172 Fig.110 - Kit V32415.................................................................................................... 173 Fig.111 - Wall supporting plate ..................................................................................... 178 Fig.112 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism ........................................................ 179 Fig.113 - Mounting possible positions ............................................................................. 180 Fig.114 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate ................................................ 181 Fig.115 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 182 Fig.116 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 183 Fig.117 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version .................................................................. 184 Fig.118 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 185 Fig.119 - Kit V32409.................................................................................................... 186 Fig.120 - Kit V32415.................................................................................................... 187 Fig.121 - Centring ring position ..................................................................................... 193 Fig.122 - Antislide strip ................................................................................................ 194 Fig.123 - Support mount on pole ................................................................................... 195 Fig.124 - Supporting system position ............................................................................. 196 Fig.125 - Hole E .......................................................................................................... 196 Fig.126 - Antenna installation on pole support................................................................. 197 Fig.127 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 197 Fig.128 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 198 Fig.129 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 199 Fig.130 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 200 Fig.131 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization .......................................... 200 Fig.132 - Hybrid and polarization disk ............................................................................ 201 Fig.133 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)........................................... 202 Fig.134 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 203 Fig.135 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 204 Fig.136 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 205 Fig.137 - Antenna aiming block ..................................................................................... 206 Fig.138 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 207 Fig.139 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 212 Fig.140 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 213 Fig.141 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 213 Fig.142 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 214 Fig.143 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 215 Fig.144 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 216 Fig.145 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 217 Fig.146 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 218 Fig.147 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 219 Fig.148 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 220
316
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.149 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 221 Fig.150 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 227 Fig.151 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 228 Fig.152 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 228 Fig.153 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 229 Fig.154 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 230 Fig.155 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 231 Fig.156 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 232 Fig.157 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 233 Fig.158 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 234 Fig.159 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 235 Fig.160 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 236 Fig.161 - Pole installation of the support......................................................................... 240 Fig.162 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version) ..................... 241 Fig.163 - Installation of the ODU on the support .............................................................. 242 Fig.164 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna ..................... 243 Fig.165 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal ....................................................... 248 Fig.166 - Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection ............................................. 249 Fig.167 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput ..................................................................... 250 Fig.168 - Tributary enable ............................................................................................ 251 Fig.169 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 252 Fig.170 - Lan1 interface settings.................................................................................. 252 Fig.171 - Vlan settings for Lan1 ................................................................................... 253 Fig.172 - Priority setting for Lan1 and Internal Port ........................................................ 253 Fig.173 - Vlan settings for Internal Port .......................................................................... 254 Fig.174 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 254 Fig.175 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan1 port ............................................ 255 Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans ......................................................... 256 Fig.177 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged ....................... 256 Fig.178 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management ......................................................... 257 Fig.179 - 3 to 1 port connections ................................................................................... 257 Fig.180 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan1 port............................................... 258 Fig.181 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301............................................................... 259 Fig.182 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration ......................................................... 259 Fig.183 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority................................... 260 Fig.184 - Output properties of VLAN 701 ........................................................................ 261 Fig.185 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan................................... 261 Fig.186 - Queue selection ............................................................................................. 262 Fig.187 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag............................ 263 Fig.188 - Incoming packets at Lan1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status. ........................................................................................................................ 263 Fig.189 - Baseband configuration .................................................................................. 265 Fig.190 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction .................................................... 266
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
317
Fig.191 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction ........................................................ 267 Fig.192 - Tributary enabling window .............................................................................. 268 Fig.193 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s ... 268 Fig.194 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/s ............................................................................................. 269 Fig.195 - Protection policy of a tributary stream .............................................................. 270 Fig.196 - East/West Passthrough connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/ s ................................................................................................................................ 270 Fig.197 - Configurator.................................................................................................. 272 Fig.198 - Radio/Tributary ............................................................................................. 273 Fig.199 - Switch parameters of the cross-connections ...................................................... 274 Fig.200 - Tributary loop on radio side............................................................................. 274 Fig.201 - Radio/radio cross-connection........................................................................... 275 Fig.202 - Tributary/Tributary Cross-connection................................................................ 276 Fig.203 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup ............................................ 277 Fig.204 - IP Ethernet ................................................................................................... 278 Fig.205 - LCT PPP ........................................................................................................ 279 Fig.206 - PPP Radio ..................................................................................................... 279 Fig.207 - Store Routing Table ....................................................................................... 280 Fig.208 - Stored Routing Table...................................................................................... 281 Fig.209 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 282 Fig.210 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration ..................................... 283 Fig.211 - Add new station............................................................................................. 284 Fig.212 - Add New Network Element .............................................................................. 285 Fig.213 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 286 Fig.214 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 287 Fig.215 - IDU front ...................................................................................................... 291 Fig.216 - Standard IDU GAI0003 ................................................................................... 301 Fig.217 - IDU GAI0054 ................................................................................................ 301 Fig.218 - IDU GAI0062 ................................................................................................ 301 Fig.219 - IDU GAI0153 ................................................................................................ 301 Fig.220 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 302 Fig.221 - IDU Plus 1RU composition ............................................................................... 306 Fig.222 - IDU Plus 2RU composition ............................................................................... 306 Fig.223 - 24E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 307 Fig.224 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal .................................................................................... 307 Fig.225 - 53E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 307 Fig.226 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1 .............................................................................. 308 Fig.227 - IDU Plus P/N ................................................................................................. 308 Fig.228 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 310 Fig.229 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics .............. 311
318
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
45
LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................13 Tab.2 - Ethernet traffic capacity according to the number of used E1.....................................29 Tab.3 - Transmission capacity Modular IDU Plus .................................................................30 Tab.4 - IDU consumption ...............................................................................................31 Tab.5 - Guaranteed current absorbition for power supply connector ......................................32 Tab.6 - IDU/ODU dimensions ...........................................................................................32 Tab.7 - IDU/ODU weight .................................................................................................33 Tab.8 - Optical interface characteristics .............................................................................42 Tab.9 - Aggregate frame .................................................................................................48 Tab.10 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................49 Tab.11 - Aggregate frame ...............................................................................................64 Tab.12 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................65 Tab.13 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations ..............................................................84 Tab.14 - Capacity change ................................................................................................90 Tab.15 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................93 Tab.16 - Transmission capacity of the IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet................................ 103 Tab.17 - Nominal output power (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU (1 dB tolerance) ................ 117 Tab.18 - Transmit alarm priority..................................................................................... 120 Tab.19 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 133 Tab.20 - Tributary connector pinout (Sub-D 25 pin male)................................................. 136 Tab.21 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description (RJ45) .. 137 Tab.22 - LCT connector pinout for connection to supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male) ...... 137 Tab.23 - RSR232 connector pinout for supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male).................... 137 Tab.24 - CH1 connector pinout for 9600 bit/s V.24 interface (RJ45) ................................ 138 Tab.25 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45)............ 138 Tab.26 - CH2 connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45) ...................... 138 Tab.27 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pinout (RJ45) ......................................................... 139 Tab.28 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside (SubD 9 pin male) ............................................................................................................... 139 Tab.29 - Tributary connector pinout (male 25 pin SUBD)................................................ 141 Tab.30 - Q3 connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) ........................ 142 Tab.31 - S.C. connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface (RJ45) ...................... 142 Tab.32 - S.C. connector pinout V.28 interface (RJ45).................................................... 142 Tab.33 - Connector pinout RS232 PPP interface (Sub-D 9 pin male)............................... 143 Tab.34 - User in/out connector pinout (Sub-D 9 pin male) ............................................... 143 Tab.35 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm .............................................................................. 145 Tab.36 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)............................................... 147
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
319
Tab.37 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) 148 Tab.38 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (SUBD 9 pin male).................................... 148 Tab.39 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)................. 149 Tab.40 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) ............... 149 Tab.41 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45) ............... 149 Tab.42 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 150 Tab.43 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45).......................................................... 150 Tab.44 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)............................................... 150 Tab.45 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female) ................................................ 152 Tab.46 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)............................................... 153 Tab.47 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) 154 Tab.48 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (RJ45)..................................................... 154 Tab.49 - V11 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) ............... 155 Tab.50 - V11 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 asynchronous interface (RJ45) 155 Tab.51 - V11 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 155 Tab.52 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)............................................... 156 Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 158 Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 159 Tab.55 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 160 Tab.56 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175 Tab.57 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175 Tab.58 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 177 Tab.59 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 190 Tab.60 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 211 Tab.61 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 226 Tab.62 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 239 Tab.63 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 300 Tab.64 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 303 Tab.65 - IDU Plus part number....................................................................................... 305 Tab.66 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number.......................................... 309
320
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
46
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
321
322
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

SIAE - ALS PDH Radio Family - Manual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

SIAE - ALS PDH Radio Family - Manual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

ALS

Access Link Series PDH radio family

MN.00183.E - 003 Volume 1/1

Section 1. USER GUIDE

Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................19 4.1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................19

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

8.1.4 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................51

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

14.4.4 CONTROLLER ....................................................................................... 110

16 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................118 16.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 118

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

24.2 24.3 24.4

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................297 38.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 297

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 8. LISTS AND SERVICES

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 1. USER GUIDE

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES

FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

Fig.4 - Laser indication

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment)

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

Section 1 User Guide

Section 2 Description and specifications

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 6 Programming and supervision

Section 8 Lists and assistance

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

EMC/EMI EOC ERC ESD FEC FEM HDLC IDU

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Compact IDU unit

Modular IDU Plus

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna